Tektronix TG700 Technical Reference

xx
ZZZ
TG700
TV Signal Generator Platform
Specifications and Performance Verification
Technical Reference
*P077013706*
077-0137-06
xx
ZZZ
TG700
TV Signal Generator Platform
Specifications and Performance Verification
Technical Reference
This document applies to firmware version 5.6 and above.
www.tektronix.com
077-0137-06
Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries
or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14150 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
For product information, sales, service, and technical support:
In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
Warranty
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its
option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement
in exchange for the defective product. Parts, modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty
work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance. All replaced parts, modules and products become
the property of Tektronix.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of
the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible
for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping
charges prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within
the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping
charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage
resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product;
b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage
or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or
integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty
of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE
AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.
TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
[W2 – 15AUG04]
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary ......................................................................................... vi
Preface .............................................................................................................. ix
Products........................................................................................................ ix
Related User Documents...................................................................................... x
Specifications ....................................................................................................... 1
TG700 Mainframe Specifications............................................................................ 1
AG7 Specifications ............................................................................................ 4
AGL7 Specifications .......................................................................................... 6
ATG7 Specifications........................................................................................... 8
AVG7 Specifications ......................................................................................... 12
AWVG7 Specifications ...................................................................................... 14
BG7 Specifications ........................................................................................... 16
DVG7 Specifications ......................................................................................... 18
GPS7 Specifications .......................................................................................... 20
HD3G7 Specifications........................................................................................ 28
HDLG7 Specifications ....................................................................................... 38
HDVG7 Specifications ....................................................................................... 44
SDI7 Specifications........................................................................................... 46
Performance Verification ......................................................................................... 55
Performance Verification Preparation ...................................................................... 55
TG700 Mainframe Performance Verification .............................................................. 56
AG7 Module Performance Verification .................................................................... 59
AGL7 Module Performance Verification................................................................... 65
ATG7 Module Performance Verification ................................................................... 78
AVG7 Module Performance Verification................................................................... 91
AWVG7 Module Performance Verification.............................................................. 110
BG7 Module Performance Verification................................................................... 122
DVG7 Module Performance Verification ................................................................ 129
GPS7 Module Performance Verification ................................................................. 135
HD3G7 Module Performance Verification............................................................... 165
HDLG7 Module Performance Verification .............................................................. 178
HDVG7 Module Performance Verification .............................................................. 182
SDI7 Module Performance Verification .................................................................. 191
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
i
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1: TG700 dimensions ...................................................................................... 3
Figure 2: Equipment connection for verifying subcarrier frequency ........................................ 58
Figure 3: Initial equipment connection for verifying the serial digital audio outputs...................... 61
Figure 4: Second equipment connection for verifying the serial digital audio outputs .................... 63
Figure 5: Equipment connection for verifying the 48 kHz clock output .................................... 64
Figure 6: Equipment connections for verifying the genlock function ....................................... 68
Figure 7: Equipment connection for verifying the trilevel sync outputs .................................... 71
Figure 8: Equipment connection for verifying burst and sync amplitude ................................... 74
Figure 9: Equipment connection for verifying subcarrier frequency ........................................ 75
Figure 10: Location of the J040 and J960 connectors ......................................................... 76
Figure 11: Equipment connection for verifying the 48 kHz clock output ................................... 77
Figure 12: Equipment connection for verifying pulse amplitude ............................................ 81
Figure 13: Equipment connection for verifying burst and sync amplitude ................................. 84
Figure 14: Equipment connection for verifying the DC offset and amplitude error ....................... 94
Figure 15: Equipment connection for verifying the channel-to-channel delay ............................. 97
Figure 16: Equipment connection for verifying the frequency response .................................... 99
Figure 17: Verifying the signal amplitudes from 500 kHz to 5 MHz ...................................... 101
Figure 18: Equipment connection for verifying the line time distortion .................................. 102
Figure 19: Equipment connection for checking the color bars signal ..................................... 109
Figure 20: Equipment connection for verifying the DC offset and amplitude error ..................... 112
Figure 21: Equipment connection for verifying the frequency response .................................. 115
Figure 22: Verifying the signal amplitudes ................................................................... 116
Figure 23: Equipment connection for verifying the field time distortion ................................. 117
Figure 24: Equipment connection for checking the color bars signal ..................................... 121
Figure 25: Equipment connection for verifying the trilevel sync outputs................................. 124
Figure 26: Equipment connection for verifying burst and sync amplitude ............................... 127
Figure 27: Equipment connection for verifying the serial digital outputs................................. 130
Figure 28: Equipment connections for verifying the serial digital video outputs ........................ 180
Figure 29: Equipment connections for verifying the HDVG7 serial digital outputs ..................... 185
Figure 30: Equipment connection for verifying the output level and eye pattern ........................ 189
Figure 31: Example of eye pattern for an acceptable output signal........................................ 189
ii
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table 1: Electrical characteristics.................................................................................
Table 2: Environmental characteristics ..........................................................................
Table 3: Mechanical characteristics ..............................................................................
Table 4: AES/EBU serial digital audio outputs .................................................................
Table 5: SILENCE output .........................................................................................
Table 6: 48 kHz CLOCK output ..................................................................................
Table 7: Output timing .............................................................................................
Table 8: Environmental characteristics ..........................................................................
Table 9: Electrical characteristics, Genlock function...........................................................
Table 10: Black burst signal and HDTV trilevel sync signal outputs.........................................
Table 11: Word clock signal output ..............................................................................
Table 12: Environmental characteristics .........................................................................
Table 13: Black burst and timing pulse outputs .................................................................
Table 14: Color bars signal output................................................................................
Table 15: Test signal output ......................................................................................
Table 16: Common outputs characteristics .....................................................................
Table 17: Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
Table 18: Output channels........................................................................................
Table 19: Common output characteristics ......................................................................
Table 20: Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
Table 21: Output channels........................................................................................
Table 22: Common output characteristics ......................................................................
Table 23: Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
Table 24: Black burst and HDTV trilevel sync outputs .......................................................
Table 25: Color bars and black burst with field ID outputs (option CB) ....................................
Table 26: Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
Table 27: Serial digital video signal outputs ...................................................................
Table 28: Serial digital black signal outputs (Option BK only) ..............................................
Table 29: Embedded audio .......................................................................................
Table 30: Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
Table 31: Black burst and sine outputs..........................................................................
Table 32: Antenna input ..........................................................................................
Table 33: Timebase................................................................................................
Table 34: LTC outputs ............................................................................................
Table 35: LTC inputs..............................................................................................
Table 36: GPI signals .............................................................................................
Table 37: Genlock function (valid only for models with REF IN connector on rear panel) ..............
Table 38: Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
11
12
12
13
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
18
18
19
20
21
22
24
24
25
26
27
iii
Table of Contents
Table 39:
Table 40:
Table 41:
Table 42:
Table 43:
Table 44:
Table 45:
Table 46:
Table 47:
Table 48:
Table 49:
Table 50:
Table 51:
Table 52:
Table 53:
Table 54:
Table 55:
Table 56:
Table 57:
Table 58:
Table 59:
Table 60:
Table 61:
Table 62:
Table 63:
Table 64:
Table 65:
Table 66:
Table 67:
Table 68:
Table 69:
Table 70:
Table 71:
Table 72:
Table 73:
Table 74:
Table 75:
Table 76:
Table 77:
Table 78:
Table 79:
iv
3 Gb/s serial video signal outputs....................................................................
Trigger / clock outputs ................................................................................
HD SDI Input ..........................................................................................
Video signal content ...................................................................................
Signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons ......................................................
Convertor mode embedded audio and ancillary data ..............................................
Generator mode embedded audio and ancillary data ..............................................
Generator mode – HD-SDI (1920 × 1080)..........................................................
Generator mode – HD-SDI (1280 × 720) ...........................................................
Generator mode – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080) .....................................................
Generator mode - 3G Level A (1280 × 720)........................................................
Generator mode – 3G Level A (2K × 1080) ........................................................
Generator mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)......................................................
Generator mode – 3G Level B (2K × 1080) ........................................................
Generator mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080)..............................................
Generator mode – 3G Level B (2xHD 1280 × 720) ...............................................
Converter mode – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080)......................................................
Converter mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)......................................................
Converter mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080)..............................................
Mechanical characteristics............................................................................
Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
4:2:2 serial digital video signal input ................................................................
Dual link serial video outputs ........................................................................
Video signal content ...................................................................................
Synthesizer generated HD test signals ..............................................................
Synthesizer generated projector test patterns .......................................................
Embedded audio and ancillary data..................................................................
Supported input and output formats (SMPTE 274M to SMPTE 372M standards).............
Mechanical characteristics............................................................................
Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
Serial digital video signal outputs ...................................................................
Serial digital black signal outputs (Option BK only) ..............................................
Embedded audio .......................................................................................
Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
Serial video outputs ...................................................................................
Trigger / clock output .................................................................................
Video signal content ...................................................................................
Signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons ......................................................
Embedded audio and ancillary data..................................................................
SD-525 (720 × 486) ..................................................................................
SD-625 (720 × 576) ..................................................................................
28
29
30
30
31
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
38
38
38
39
39
41
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
48
48
49
51
52
52
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Table of Contents
Table 80: HD-SDI (1920 × 1080) ...............................................................................
Table 81: HD-SDI (1280 × 720) .................................................................................
52
Table 82: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080) ....................................................
52
Table 83: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1280 × 720)......................................................
52
Table 84: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (2K × 1080).......................................................
Table 85: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080) ....................................................
52
53
Table 86: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2K × 1080).......................................................
53
Table 87: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080) ............................................
53
Table 88: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2xHD 1280 × 720) ..............................................
53
Table 89: Mechanical characteristics............................................................................
Table 90: Environmental characteristics ........................................................................
54
54
Table 91: Required Equipment for TG700 mainframe performance verification ..........................
56
Table 92: TG700 mainframe test record ........................................................................
57
Table 93: Required equipment for AG7 performance verification ...........................................
59
Table 94: AG7 test record ........................................................................................
Table 95: Required equipment for AGL7 performance verification .........................................
60
65
Table 96: AGL7 test record ......................................................................................
66
Table 97: Required equipment for ATG7 performance verification .........................................
78
Table 98: ATG7 test record.......................................................................................
79
Table 99: Required equipment for AVG7 performance verification .........................................
Table 100: AVG7 test record .....................................................................................
91
92
52
Table 101: Required equipment for AWVG7 performance verification...................................
110
Table 102: AWVG7 test record ................................................................................
110
Table 103: Required equipment for BG7 performance verification........................................
122
Table 104: BG7 test record .....................................................................................
Table 105: Required equipment for DVG7 performance verification .....................................
122
129
Table 106: DVG7 test record...................................................................................
129
Table 107: Required equipment for GPS7 performance verification ......................................
135
Table 108: GPS7 test record....................................................................................
137
Table 109: Required equipment for HD3G7 performance verification....................................
Table 110: HD3G7 test record .................................................................................
165
167
Table 111: Required equipment for HDLG7 performance verification....................................
178
Table 112: HDLG7 test record .................................................................................
179
Table 113: Required equipment for HDVG7 performance verification ...................................
182
Table 114: HDVG7 test record.................................................................................
Table 115: Required equipment for SDI7 performance verification .......................................
183
191
Table 116: SDI7 test record ....................................................................................
192
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
v
General Safety Summary
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it.
To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To Avoid Fire or Personal
Injury
Use proper power cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Ground the product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe all terminal ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
Power disconnect. The power cord disconnects the product from the power source.
Do not block the power cord; it must remain accessible to the user at all times.
Do not operate without covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Do not operate with suspected failures. If you suspect that there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Avoid exposed circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components when
power is present.
Wear eye protection. Wear eye protection if exposure to high-intensity rays or
laser radiation exists.
Do not operate in wet/damp conditions.
Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere.
Keep product surfaces clean and dry.
Provide proper ventilation. Refer to the manual's installation instructions for details
on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
vi
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
General Safety Summary
Terms in This Manual
These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.
Symbols and Terms on the
Product
These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read
the marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you
read the marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
The following symbol(s) may appear on the product:
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
vii
General Safety Summary
viii
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Preface
This manual describes the specifications and performance verification procedures
for the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform and related modules. It is divided
into two sections: Specifications and Performance Verification. The first section
provides physical and electrical specifications. The latter section provides
performance verification procedures.
Products
The information in this manual applies to the following products:
TG700 TV Generator Platform
AG7 Audio Generator Module
AGL7 Analog Genlock Module
ATG7 Analog Test Generator Module
AVG7 Analog Video Generator Module
AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator Module
BG7 Black Generator Module
DVG7 Digital Video Generator Module
GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module
HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator
HDLG7 HD Dual Link Generator Module
HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator Module
SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator Module
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
ix
Preface
Related User Documents
Following is a list of documents that contain user information about the TG700
and its related modules:
The TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual (Tektronix part
number 071-1970-XX English, 071-1971-XX Japanese) describes how to
install and operate the mainframe and related modules.
The TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Programmer Manual (Tektronix
part number 077-0139-XX) provides programming information for the
mainframe and related modules.
The TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform PC Tools Technical Reference
(Tektronix part number 077-0138-XX) describes how to use certain PC tools
available for the mainframe and related modules.
The TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Service Manual (Tektronix part
number 077-0230-XX) describes how to service the TG700 mainframe to
the module level (such as circuit boards and fuses) and provides general
information about servicing generator modules. Specific service information
for a module is located in its service manual.
The TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Release Notes (Tektronix part
number 077-0228-XX English; 077-0443-XX Japanese) describes the new
features, improvements, and limitations of the most recent available firmware
for the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform.
The Video Sync Pulse Generator & Electronic Changeover Unit System
Integration Technical Reference (Tektronix part number 077-0563-XX)
provides information for system integrators who are designing systems for
high-definition (HD) and standard-definition (SD) digital video content where
Tektronix electronic changeover units and video sync pulse generators are
to be deployed.
x
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
The information in this section provides electrical, mechanical, and environmental
specifications for the TG700 mainframe and related modules.
The performance requirements listed in the electrical characteristics portion of
these specifications apply over an ambient temperature range of 0 °C to +50 °C.
The rated accuracies are valid when the instrument is calibrated at an ambient
temperature range of +20 °C to +30 °C, after a warm-up time of 20 minutes.
TG700 Mainframe Specifications
The following tables list certification and compliance information, and the
electrical, environmental, and mechanical characteristics of the TG700 mainframe.
Electrical Characteristics
The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the TG700 mainframe.
Table 1: Electrical characteristics
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
The number of modules that can be
installed
Maximum 4
Only a limited number of some modules can be
installed in a TG700 mainframe:
AGL7, GPS7– Only one (1) of these modules can
be installed in the mainframe at a time. When
one is installed, it must be installed in slot 1 only
AWVG7, HD3G7, and HDVG7 – Only a
combined total of two (2) of these modules can
be installed in the mainframe at the same time
when the HDVG7 module has a rear-panel fan.
If the HDVG7 module does not have a rear-panel
fan, then a combined total of three (3) of these
modules can be installed.
Clock, stability
< 1 ppm/year
AC power
source
Rating voltage
100 V to 240 VAC
WARNING. To reduce the risk of fire and
shock, ensure the mains supply voltage
fluctuations do not exceed 10% of the operating
voltage range.
Frequency
range
48 Hz to 63 Hz
Maximum
power
120 VA
Maximum
current
1.2 A
Heat Dissipation, maximum power
120 VA maximum. Maximum line current is
1.2 Arms at 50 Hz
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
1
Specifications
Table 1: Electrical characteristics (cont.)
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Surge current
Clearance
Reference information
≤ 40 A peak for equal or less than 5 line cycles,
after the instrument has been turned off for at
least 30 seconds.
Side
5 cm
Rear
5 cm
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the
TG700 mainframe.
Table 2: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Nonoperating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation) Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Nonoperating
5% to 90% (No condensation) Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet) Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above
1.5 km.
Nonoperating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
2.65 m/s2 (0.27 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Nonoperating
22.3 m/s2 (2.28 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, Nonoperating
2
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Mechanical Characteristics
The following table lists the mechanical characteristics of the TG700 mainframe.
Table 3: Mechanical characteristics
Characteristic
Dimensions
Description
Height
44 mm
Width
483 mm
Depth
Weight 1, net
1
559 mm
Approximately 5.5 kg (mainframe only, without rack rail)
Weight of the TG700 will vary depending on the number and type of generator or other modules installed.
Figure 1: TG700 dimensions
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
3
Specifications
AG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the
AG7 Audio Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
AG7 module.
Table 4: AES/EBU serial digital audio outputs
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Connector
4
BNC
Number of channels
8
1+2, 3+4, 5+6, and 7+8
Quantized resolution
20 or 24 bits
User selectable
Audio tone
Frequency
Silence to 20 kHz
31 discrete settings
Level
0 to –60 dBFS in 1 dB steps
Pre-emphasis
None
Output level
1± 0.1 V
Required receiver termination
75 Ω± 10%
Jitter
Within ± 20%
Rise and fall times
Between 30 ns and 44 ns
Measured across 75 Ω.
Measured from the 10% to 90% points.
Table 5: SILENCE output
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
SILENCE
Same signal as AES/EBU Serial Digital Audio
“Silence”.
Connector
BNC
Output level
1± 0.1 V
Required receiver termination
75 Ω± 10%
Jitter
Within± 20%
Rise and fall times
Between 30 ns and 44 ns
Measured across 75 Ω.
Measured from the 10% to 90% points.
Table 6: 48 kHz CLOCK output
Characteristic
Performance requirements
48 kHz CLOCK
Reference information
Reference Clock for AES/EBU Serial Digital Audio.
Connector
BNC
Output level
User selectable by the internal jumper. Level 1 is
selected at the factory.
4
Level 1
CMOS compatible
High > 2.1 V, Low < 0.8 V
Level 2
1± 0.1 V
Measured across 75 Ω.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 7: Output timing
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Reference information
Range
± 160 ms
Relative to the frame reset signal.
Resolution
1 μs
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the AG7 module.
Table 8: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Temperature
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Nonoperating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Nonoperating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
Nonoperating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
3.04 m/s2 (0.31 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Nonoperating
23.3 m/s2 (2.38 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, nonoperating
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
5
Specifications
AGL7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the
AGL7 Genlock module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
AGL7 module.
Table 9: Electrical characteristics, Genlock function
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Input configuration
75 Ω loop through
REF inputs
Return loss
Input requirements
CW input
> 40 dB
5 MHz
> 35 dB
5 MHz to 30 MHz
NTSC/PAL black burst or Trilevel sync
Reference
inputs
Amplitude
± 6 dB
S/N ratio
> 40 dB
SCH phase
± 40 °
CW input
1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, or 10 MHz CW
Input range
Pull-in range
Jitter
75 Ω terminated
The CW input connector can be
configured to output a 48 kHz word
clock signal by changing internal
cabling.
1 to 2.5 Vp-p
Subcarrier frequency ± 15 Hz
Burst lock
< 0.5°
Sync lock
< 1 ns
Table 10: Black burst signal and HDTV trilevel sync signal outputs
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
3
BLACK1, BLACK2, and BLACK3
BLACK1
Black burst
BLACK1 always generates Black burst.
BLACK2
Black burst or Trilevel sync
When the trilevel sync signal is selected,
the signal to be the same signal as BLACK
3 is output.
BLACK3
Black burst or Trilevel sync
When the black burst is selected, the signal
to be the same signal as BLACK 2 is output.
Configuration
Burst amplitude accuracy
± 2%
Sync amplitude accuracy
± 2%
6
Reference information
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 10: Black burst signal and HDTV trilevel sync signal outputs (cont.)
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Sync rise time
Reference information
NTSC
140 ns
PAL
250 ns
Return loss
> 30 dB to 30 MHz
Timing offset
Range
Full color frame
Resolution
< 0.5° of sub carrier
Table 11: Word clock signal output
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Reference information
NOTE. This output is enabled when the configuration of the CW connector is changed.
Connector
BNC
Frequency
48 kHz
Level
CMOS
compatible
Impedance
75 Ω ± 10%
Environmental
Characteristics
Same connector as CW
Without termination
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the AGL7 module.
Table 12: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Non-operating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
3.04 m/s2 (0.31 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Non-operating
23.3 m/s2 (2.38 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, non-operating
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
7
Specifications
ATG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical characteristics and the environmental
characteristics of the ATG7 Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
ATG7 module.
Table 13: Black burst and timing pulse outputs
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
2
Output impedance, typical
75 Ω
Black burst
output signals
Timing pulse
output
Reference information
BLACK 1 and BLACK 2
NTSC and NTSC No Setup
Black Burst Black Burst with Field
REF
PAL
Black Burst Black Burst with No Field
REF
Amplitude accuracy
1.0 ± 0.1 V
Rise time
NTSC and
NTSC No
Setup
140 ± 20 ns
PAL
25 0± 20 ns
Output signals
8
NTSC and
NTSC No
Setup
Composite Sync
Composite Blanking
Subcarrier
H Drive
V Drive
Field Reference
PAL
Composite Sync Subcarrier
Composite Blanking
H Drive
V Drive
Field Reference
PAL Pulse
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 14: Color bars signal output
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
1
Output impedance, typical
75 Ω
Output signals
Reference information
BARS
NTSC and
NTSC No
Setup
SMPTE Color Bar
100% Color Bar
75% Color Bar
40% Flat Field
Black Burst
Black Burst with Field REF
Other 1
Other 2
PAL
100% Color Bar
75% Color Bar
100% Color Bar Over Red
75% Color Bar Over Red
40% Flat Field
Black Burst
Black Burst No Field REF
Other 1
Other 2
ID text
Maximum 18 characters
Luminance amplitude accuracy
± 1%
Measured at 700 mV.
Chrominance to luminance gain
± 2%
Chrominance is measured at red portion of
the 75% Color Bar Over Red signal.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
9
Specifications
Table 15: Test signal output
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
1
Output impedance, typical
75 Ω
Output signals
SIGNAL
NTSC and
NTSC
No Setup
formats
100%, 75%, SMPTE Color Bars
5 Step, 10 Step, Modulated 5 Step,
Modulated Pedestal, Modulated Ramp,
Ramp, Shallow Ramp
0% Flat Field (NTSC format only), 10% Flat
Field, 40% Flat field, 50% Flat Field, 100%
Flat Field, Field Square Wave, Black Burst,
Black Burst with Field Reference
100% Multiburst, 60% Multiburst, Multipulse
100% Sweep, 60% Sweep, Chroma
Response
100% Red Field, 75% Red Field, 2 Level
Ped. & Pluge, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge,
Convergence, Gray Window, White Window,
Safe Area, Monitor Setup
Window 2T Pulse Bar, Sin X/X
FCC Composite, FCC Multiburst, NTC7
Combination, NTC7 Composite, Test Matrix,
SNG Color Bars
PAL format
100% Colour Bars, 75% Colour Bars, 100%
Colour Bars Over Red, 75% Colour Bars
Over Red
5 Step, 10 Step, Modulated 5 Step,
Modulated Pedestal, Modulated Ramp,
Ramp, Shallow Ramp
40% Flat field, 50% Flat Field, 100% Flat
Field, Field Square Wave, Black Burst, Black
Burst with No Field Reference, Field Square
Wave
100% Multiburst, Multipulse
100% Sweep, 60% Sweep
100% Red Field, 75% Red Field, 2 Level
Ped. & Pluge, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge,
Convergence, Grey Window, White Window,
Safe Area, Monitor Setup Matrix
2T Pulse Bar, Sin X/X
CCIR 17, CCIR 18, CCIR 330, CCIR 331,
UKITS 1, UKITS 2, UK 1 Line ITS, ITS Matrix
ID text
Maximum 18 characters
Luminance amplitude accuracy
± 1%
10
Reference information
Measured at 700 mV.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 15: Test signal output (cont.)
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Chrominance to luminance gain
± 1%
Reference information
Frequency response
± 1%
To 5 MHz
Chrominance to luminance delay
≤ 10 ns
Measured at 500 kHz and 4.43 MHz.
Linearity
< 1%
< 0.5% (typical); measured at 5 step signal.
Differential gain error
< 0.5%
Measured at modulated 5 step signal.
Differential phase error
< 0.5°
Measured at modulated 5 step signal.
Field tilt
< 0.5%
Line tilt
< 0.5%
Table 16: Common outputs characteristics
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Return loss
≥ 36 dB
To 6 MHz
Burst amplitude accuracy
± 2%
Sync amplitude accuracy
± 2%
Blanking level
0 mV± 50 mV
SCH phase accuracy
0° ± 5°
Timing offset
Range
Full color frame
Resolution
54 MHz clock resolution
Environmental
Characteristics
≈18.5 ns
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the ATG7 module.
Table 17: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Nonoperating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Nonoperating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
Nonoperating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
3.04 m/s2 (0.31 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Nonoperating
23.3 m/s2 (2.38 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, nonoperating
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
11
Specifications
AVG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the
AVG7 Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
AVG7 module.
Table 18: Output channels
Characteristic
Channel 1 (CH 1)
Channel 2 (CH 2)
Channel 3 (CH 3)
Performance requirements
Number of
outputs
2
Output signals
Y, G, or composite
Number of
outputs
2
Output signals
B-Y, Pb, B, C, or composite
Number of
outputs
2
Output signals
R-Y, Pr, R, or composite
Reference information
Each component of a composite signal
can be turned On or Off using the VIDEO
submenu.
Each component of a composite signal
can be turned On or Off using the VIDEO
submenu.
Each component of a composite signal
can be turned On or Off using the VIDEO
submenu.
Table 19: Common output characteristics
Characteristic
Amplitude error
Delay error
Performance requirements
Reference information
Absolute
amplitude
≤ 1%
Measured at 700 mV.
Channel gain
matching
≤ 0.5%
Measured at 700 mV, relative to CH 1.
Chrominance
to luminance
gain
≤ 1%
Measured at 700 mV, relative to 500 kHz.
Channel to
channel delay
12
≤ 2.5 ns on a composite output.
Chrominance
to luminance
delay, typical
≤ 2 ns
Relative to CH 1
Group delay,
typical
≤ 5 ns to 5 MHz
SCH Phase
error, typical
≤ 1.25 ns (± 1.6° at 3.58 MHz and (plus-min) 2°
at 4.43 MHz)
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 19: Common output characteristics (cont.)
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Frequency response
Flat within 0.5% peak from 0.5 MHz to
5 MHz.
Typically ≤ 5% to 8 MHz at 700 mV, measured
with a 1 m coax cable and peak detector.
Line time distortion
≤ 0.5%
Measured with FCC composite signal.
Field time distortion
≤ 0.5%
Measured with field square wave.
K factor 2T5 pulse
≤ 0.5%
Pulse/bar ratio, typical
1:1 within 0.5% with 2T5 pulse and bar signal.
DC offset
≤ 10 mV
Differential gain
≤ 0.5%
Differential phase
≤ 0.5°
Return loss
≥ 40 dB to 6 MHz
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the AVG7 module.
Table 20: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Non-operating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
2.65 m/s2 (0.27 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Non-operating
22.36 m/s2 (2.28 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, non-operating
588 m/s2 (60 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
13
Specifications
AWVG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the
AWVG7 Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
AWVG7 module.
Table 21: Output channels
Characteristic
Channel 1 (CH 1)
Channel 2 (CH 2)
Channel 3 (CH 3)
Performance requirements
Number of outputs
Reference information
2
Output signals
Y or G
Number of outputs
2
Output signals
Pb or B
Number of outputs
2
Output signals
Pr or R
Table 22: Common output characteristics
Performance requirements
Reference information
Absolute
amplitude
≤ 1%
Measured at 700 mV.
Channel gain
matching
≤ 0.5%
Measured at 700 mV, relative to CH 1.
Characteristic
Amplitude error
Delay error
Channel to
channel delay,
typical
≤ 2 ns; relative to CH 1
Group delay,
typical
≤ 3 ns to 20 MHz ≤ 5 ns to 30 MHz
Frequency response
± 1% to 20 MHz
± 2% to 28 MHz
± 3% to 30 MHz
Measured with a 1 m coax cable and peak
detector.
Line tilt
≤ 0.5%
Measured with 100% Flat Field test signal.
Field tilt
≤ 0.5%
Measured with 100% Flat Field test signal.
Pulse/bar ratio
1:1 within 0.5% with 2T5 pulse and bar signal.
DC offset
≤ 10 mV
Return loss
≥ 35 dB to 30 MHz
14
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the AWVG7 module.
Table 23: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Non-operating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15 000 feet)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50 000 feet)
Operating
2.65 m/s2 (0.27 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Non-operating
22.36 m/s2 (2.28 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, non-operating
588 m/s2 (60 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
15
Specifications
BG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical characteristics and the environmental
characteristics of the BG7 Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
BG7 module.
Table 24: Black burst and HDTV trilevel sync outputs
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
4
Output impedance, typical
75 Ω
Return loss
≥ 30 dB
To 30 MHz
Burst amplitude accuracy
± 2%
NTSC and PAL
BLACK1, BLACK2, BLACK3, and BLACK4
Sync amplitude accuracy
NTSC/PAL
± 2%
TriLevel
± 2%
Blanking level
0± 50 mV
SCH phase accuracy
0°± 5°
Timing offset
Range
Full color frame
Resolution
NTSC/PAL
1/54 μs
≈18.5 ns
TriLevel
1/74.25 μs or 1/(74.25/1.001) ms
≈13.9 ns
Table 25: Color bars and black burst with field ID outputs (option CB)
Characteristic
Color bars
signals
Performance requirements
Reference information
NTSC
100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, SMPTE Color
Bars, 40% Flat Field, SNG Color Bar, Monitor
Setup Matrix
NTSC No
Setup
100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, SMPTE Color
Bars, 40 % Flat Field, SNG Color Bar, Monitor
Setup Matrix
PAL
100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, 100% Color
Bars Over Red, 75% Color Bars Over Red,
40% Flat Field, SNG Color Bars, 4 Level Pluge,
Monitor Setup Matrix
Black burst with field ID
Luminance amplitude accuracy
± 1%
Measured at 700 mV.
Chrominance to luminance gain
± 2%
Chrominance is measured at red portion of the
75% Color Bars Over Red signal.
16
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the BG7 module.
Table 26: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Nonoperating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Nonoperating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet) Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m
above 1.5 km.
Nonoperating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
3.04 m/s2 (0.31 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Nonoperating
23.3 m/s2 (2.38 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock,
nonoperating
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
17
Specifications
DVG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the
DVG7 Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristic of the
DVG7 module.
Table 27: Serial digital video signal outputs
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of output
2
Bit Rate
143 Mbps
Reference information
SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2
270 Mbps
Signal amplitude, typical
800 mV± 10%
Rise and fall times,
typical
0.4 ns to 1.5 ns
20% to 80%
Jitter, typical
≤ 0.2 UIp-p
For all jitter frequencies above 10 Hz.
Return loss
> 15 dB
5 MHz to 270 MHz
Table 28: Serial digital black signal outputs (Option BK only)
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of output
2
Bit Rate
143 Mbps
Reference information
BLACK 1 and BLACK 2
270 Mbps
Signal amplitude, typical
800 mV± 10%
Rise and fall times,
typical
0.4 ns to 1.5 ns
20% to 80%
Jitter, typical
≤ 0.2 UIp-p
For all jitter frequencies above 10 Hz.
Return loss
> 15 dB
5 MHz to 270 MHz
Table 29: Embedded audio
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Number of channels
16 channels in 4 groups; 8 AES/EBU
audio pairs
Audio tones
Frequency
Silence to 20 kHz; 31 discrete settings
Level
–60 to 0 dBFS in 1 dB steps
Pre-emphasis
18
Reference information
Emphasis status bits can be inserted.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the DVG7 module.
Table 30: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Non-operating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet) Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m
above 1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
3.04 m/s2 (0.31 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Non-operating
23.3 m/s2 (2.38 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, non-operating
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
19
Specifications
GPS7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the
GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
GPS7 module.
Table 31: Black burst and sine outputs
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
3
Formats
Each output is individually selectable
between Bi-level NTSC with or without
field ref, NTSC No setup with or without
field pulse, PAL with or without field ref,
or Tri-level 1080i59.94, 1080i60, 1080i50,
720p59.94, 720p60, 720p50, 1080p24,
1080p23.98, 1080p29.97, 1080p30,
1080sf24, 1080sf23.98, 1080p25
Standards supported
RS170A, SMPTE RP154, SMPTE318M,
EBU N14, SMPTE240M, 274M, 296M,
RP211
Output impedance, typical
75 Ω
Return loss
40 dB from 300 kHz to 5 MHz, 30 dB to
30 MHz
Amplitude in cal mode
±1% on difference between 0 and 700 mV
DC levels
Amplitude
Standard level for selected format ±2%
Offset
0 ±50 mV
Offset in cal mode
0 ±40 mV
Bi-Level Sync
Rise and Fall
time (typical)
NTSC
140 ns
PAL
250 ns
Tri-Level Sync Rise and Fall time
(typical)
50 ns
SCH
±5 deg for NTSC and PAL
Timing Adjust Composite
Each output individually adjustable over
±½ the color frame with 0.5 deg of
subcarrier resolution
20
Reference information
All can be black, or Black #3 can be
configured as 10 MHz sine wave. Black #2
can be configured to blank during certain
errors to trigger an ECO change-over.
Nominal amplitudes are NTSC -286 mV
sync, Pal -300 mV sync, all HD rates
±300 mV tri-level sync.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 31: Black burst and sine outputs (cont.)
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Timing Adjust HD rates
Each output individually adjustable over
±½ the frame with <20 ns resolution
Signal to Noise ratio (typical)
>60 dB RMS noise relative to 700 mV. DC
to 20 MHz.
Sine output amplitude
1.5 Vp-p ±10%
Reference information
Table 32: Antenna input
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Connector
BNC
Number of inputs
1
Input impedance (typical)
50 Ω
Internally terminated
Input signal level minimum (typical)
> 18 dB above ambient level
Nominal gain of antenna minus cable loss,
so a 35 dB antenna can have 17 dB cable
loss at 1.575 GHz
Return Loss (typical)
8 dB at 1575 MHz
Input has a narrow RF filter so reflects most
energy not near the GPS signal frequency.
DC Antenna power output voltage
(typical)
3.3 or 5 V at nominal load
Sourced on Antenna input. May be enabled
or disable. Approximately 12 Ω internal
resistance so open circuit voltage is greater.
Open circuit voltage is typically 3.8 V and
5.4 V.
DC Antenna power output current
(typical)
55 mA.
Antenna fault thresholds (typical)
“OPEN” if <10 mA, “SHORT” if > 100 mA.
Else “Nominal”
Antenna power state is displayed on UI
in GPS7 status screen. Rear LED shows
green flashing if open, green steady if
nominal, red if shorted, and off if the power
is not enabled.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
21
Specifications
Table 33: Timebase
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Reference Modes
User may select Internal or external lock
to GPS Reference or to video reference.
(See Table 37.)
“Internal” sets the frequency to nominal.
“GPS Signal” sets the timebase relative
to the GPS input and aligns the frames to
extrapolate back to the SMPTE Epoch.
Video genlock sets timebase relative to
incoming timebase.
Operation when loses lock
User may select Internal or holdover
called “Stay Current Frequency”.
“Internal” reverts to the nominal frequency
as calibrated. “Stay Current Frequency ”
holds the last valid frequency from before
the input was lost.
Location Modes
(GPS mode only)
User may select “Fixed” or “Mobile”
“Fixed” stores a well-averaged position
and then uses that until set to re-acquire.
“Mobile” re-calculates the position
continuously and thus has a higher
timebase variation
Stability when locked to GPS (typical)
Allan Deviation < 1E-10, measure interval
of 1,10 or 100 sec in fixed position mode.
Note that this is for fixed mode and is a
function of mainframe oscillator, satellite
signal quality from antenna, and GPS7
functionality. For mobile mode, the Allan
deviation is about 2E-10.
Accuracy when locked to GPS
±1 part in 109 averaged over 30 sec.
After 20 min warm up and in fixed mode.
Long term stability is set by the GPS, but
short term by the mainframe..
Accuracy in internal mode (typical)
±0.1 ppm after calibration
Note that this is a function of mainframe
oscillator and is only valid inside calibration
interval.
Accuracy in Holdover Mode (typical)
±10 parts in 109 from recent valid lock
frequency, Temp change of ±5 °C.
±50 parts in 109 for 0 to 50 °C.
Translates to 10 ns of drift per 1 sec that is
in holdover mode. This is a function of the
mainframe oscillator.
Clean Recovery Holdover Drift
(GPS mode only)
±20 ms
Maximum amount of timebase drift that can
be corrected without disruption to video
timing.
Clean Recovery Holdover Duration
(typical)
(GPS mode only)
20 days, must be in stable temperature
environment and have warmed up for 20
minutes before holdover
Length of time that can be in stay current
holdover mode and recover without
disruption to syncs. Dependant on
environment and mainframe oven oscillator
stability.
Aging Drift (typical)
<0.2 ppm per year for Internal and Stay
Genlock mode at constant temperature
Timing behavior when locked
(GPS mode only)
Displays “Locked” if within 150 ns of
absolute time as detected by GPS signal
22
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 33: Timebase (cont.)
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Frame Timing Accuracy in fixed
position mode (typical)
(GPS mode only)
Outputs of any two units are typically
timed within 150 ns if both have good
signal quality and the same cable delay
from antenna to instrument
Frames Based on SMPTE 404 / TAI Epoch
Frame Behavior on Relock (typical)
(GPS mode only)
Selectable between Jam Phase, Fast
Slew and Stay Legal.
In Stay Legal mode, will stay in spec as
slew with respect to frequency offset and
drift rate spec. If in fast slew or stay legal
mode, frames will slew back to the correct
alignment via timebase offset without
jumping.
Recovery from drift may take a long
time if configured for stay legal recovery
(approximately 300 sec per line of drift at
NTSC or PAL rates).
Timebase offset during Relock (typical)
(GPS mode only)
For stay legal mode, limited to less than
±0.2 ppm frequency offset, and limited to
change less than 0.02 ppm/sec
Fast Slew has limits of ±5 ppm offset and
0.5 ppm / sec
Time to acquire satellites and achieve
specified stability (typical)
2 Minutes on boot up with warm oven,
good satellite signal, and known position
Frames may jump on initial lock to establish
correct relative positions
Definition of Lock Status Figure of Merit
(GPS mode only)
0 No signal
1 Low signal
2 Acquire Satellites
3 Bad Position
4 Acquire Position
5 Adjust Phase
6 Locked > Signal Quality ≤16
7 Locked >> Signal Quality > 16
8 Locked >>> Signal Quality > 26
9 Locked >>>> Signal Quality > 42
10 Locked >>>>> Signal Quality >68
11 Locked >>>>>> Signal Quality > 110
Note that receiver may take a few minutes
to detect and display the signal
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
23
Specifications
Table 34: LTC outputs
Characteristic
Performance requirements
LTC Output
There are four LTC outputs, only LTC 1
can be configured as an output or an input
Formats
23.98, 24, 25, 30, 30 drop as per SMPTE
12M
Output Level Accuracy
5 V ±10% at max level. Differential into
600 Ω
Output Level Range
Adjustable from 0.5 to 5 V into 600 Ω
Output Level Adj Resolution (typical)
0.5 V steps
Output Rise and Fall Time (typical)
40 μs
Output Impedance
30 Ω for each output
Output load
600 nominal, 150 min
Timing Adj range
±1 half a frame for selected format
Timing Adjust Resolution
10 μs steps
Timecode Offset Range
24 hrs
Timecode Offset Resolution
1 frame
Reference information
Table 35: LTC inputs
Characteristic
Performance requirements
LTC Input
LTC 1 can be configured as an input or
an output
Formats
23.98, 24, 25, 30, 30 drop as per
SMPTE 12M
Timing to video
To correctly associate the LTC with a
given video frame, the LTC start bit should
be from 32 us before to 160 us after the
start of the first broad pulse in vertical
blanking of a compatible frame rate being
used as the genlock input. This is as
specified in SMPTE 12M.
Will accept input timing anywhere in the
frame. However, near the middle of the
video frame the timing may be interpreted as
related to the previous or next video frame.
A status screen indicates the detected
timing in ms.
Signal Voltage Range
0.5 to 10 V p-p differential, 1 V to 5 V p-p
single ended.
Typical sensitivity is 100 mV differential and
400 mV single ended. Max combination of
DC, signal, hum and noise limited to 4 V
RMS on each input.
Noise Tolerance
-30 dB SNR RMS white noise with 10 KHz
BW to the p-p signal level , or -10 dB
SNR for 5 MHz white noise.
Hum Tolerance
0 dB hum-to-signal ratio
Error Immunity
100 consecutive frames with consistent
time code must be detected for time to be
considered valid.
Input Impedance
Nominal 600 Ω differential, 300 Ω single
ended
24
Reference information
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 36: GPI signals
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Connections
2 open collector outputs and one input
with pull-up
Logical Functions
The function of the input and outputs may
be set from the UI
Input High level (typical)
2.4 V min
Input Low Level (typical)
0.8 V max
Input Timing (typical)
Inputs valid if detected on three
consecutive samples at approximately
16.7 ms SW polling loop. Will always
ignore inputs that are asserted for less
then 25 ms, and will always detect a pulse
asserted more than 75 ms.
Output Low Voltage (typical)
0.5 V at 100 mA
Output Max high voltage (typical)
25 Volts max
Output Max current (typical)
300 mA
Output Duration (typical)
Signal Alarms asserted as long as the
error condition exists. Timer based
outputs asserted for the 1 sec that the
selected time counter matches the user
defined time.
Reference information
Outputs may be set to assert at a given
program time, when unlocked from GPS or
Genlock, or at an adjustable Antenna signal
level. When in Genlock mode, outputs may
also be set to assert when near loss of
genlock occurs or when no genlock input
signal is detected.
Input may be set to reset the program time,
assert jam sync, or to reacquire position.
Outputs internally pulled up to 5 V through
10 kΩ and a diode
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
25
Specifications
Table 37: Genlock function (valid only for models with REF IN connector on rear panel)
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Reference information
Input type
75 Ω BNC, terminated
User Selectable alternate function for
the Black 1 output
Input formats
Bi-Level NTSC, NTSC with
SMPTE318 10 field flag, PAL,
Tri-level HD 1080i59.94, 1080i50,
720p59.94, 720p60, 1080p23.98,
1080p24. 1080p29.97, 1080p30,
1080p25
Input signal level range (typical)
- 8 to + 6 dB
Input DC tolerance
± 5 V maximum or damage may occur
Hum tolerance (typical)
- 3 dB of 50 or 60 Hz hum
White noise tolerance
- 33 dB minimum SNR of 5 MHz BW
noise
With nominal operation
SCH tolerance
± 40°
Return loss (typical)
≥ 30 dB
300 kHz to 10 MHz
Pull-in range
± 5 ppm
Subcarrier frequency ± 15 Hz
± 3 dB amplitude change and > 40
dB S/N ratio
Jitter
(typical)
Burst lock
< 0.5°
Sync lock
< 1 ns
VITC
Video formats supported
+ VITS can be decoded from NTSC
and PAL as per SMPTE 12M-1 2008
Lines on which VITC is detected
+ VITC is detected on lines 6 to 22 for
all formats
Timing in line
VITC conforming to the standard
timing will be detected; VITC slightly
outside the normal timing range may
also be detected, but it must not run
into burst or sync
Allowed video SNR
VITC will be correctly decoded for
signals with more that 30 dB SNR
26
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the GPS7 module.
Table 38: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Nonoperating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Nonoperating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
Nonoperating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
27
Specifications
HD3G7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical, mechanical, and environmental
characteristics of the HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
HD3G7 module.
Table 39: 3 Gb/s serial video signal outputs
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Connector
75 Ω BNC
Number of outputs
2
SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2
Format
Compatible with
SMPTE 425M,
SMPTE 274, SMPTE 292,
SMPTE 296, and
SMPTE 424
(See Table 46 on page 34.) (See Table 47 on page 34.) (See Table 48
on page 34.) (See Table 49 on page 34.) (See Table 50 on page 34.)
(See Table 51 on page 35.) (See Table 52 on page 35.) (See Table 53 on
page 35.) (See Table 54 on page 35.)
Output level
800 mVp-p
± 3% on level after ringing has settled
18 to 28° C range
Measure on 20 Bit square wave in calibration mode
Output Level Variation
with Temperature,
typical
± 1% typical for 0 to 50°C
Rise and fall times
135 ps max. (20% to
80%) measured between
runs of at least 3 bits
times of constant level
20% to 80%
3 Gb alignment jitter,
typical (generator mode)
67 ps p-p
0.2 UI
3 Gb timing jitter, typical
(generator mode)
80 ps p-p
0.24 UI
HD alignment jitter,
typical (generator mode)
60 ps p-p
0.1 UI
HD timing jitter, typical
(generator mode)
80 ps p-p
0.12 UI
Jitter, typical (converter
mode)
>3 dB attenuation
above 50 Hz, limited
by generator jitter floor
spec.
Return loss, typical
≥ 20 dB
5 MHz to 2.5 GHz
≥ 10 dB
2.5 GHz to 3 GHz
Overshoot, typical
< 5%
28
Reference information
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 39: 3 Gb/s serial video signal outputs (cont.)
Characteristic
DC shift during 3 Gb
mode 32 μs pathological
pattern, typical
Performance
requirements
≤ 25 mV
Reference information
Amount of shift depends on video format. Many 3Gb/s formats will be
less than ½ of this.
Signal timing, 3 Gb
and HD in “Serial (0H)”
timing mode, typical
Signals are nominally timed, so that the timing reference point on the
serial output is aligned within 0.5 μs of the reference edge of an analog
reference signal at the same frame rate. Vertically, the first lines with the
broad pulses are aligned.
Timing adjust of lines is in terms of the raster image, so for Level B
signals, this corresponds to ½ of the time for the multiplexed combination
of two lines.
Signal timing for HD
signals in “Analog
(DAC)” mode typical
Signals are nominally timed, so that after the SDI signal is passed through
a D to A conversion, the sync of the resulting analog signal is aligned within
0.5 μs of the reference edge of an analog reference signal at the same
frame rate. Vertically, the first lines with the broad pulses are aligned.
Table 40: Trigger / clock outputs
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Reference information
Connector
50 Ω output
75 Ω BNC connector
Number of outputs
1, configurable as clock,
line, or field/frame
The Field/Frame and Line rate signals are derived from the H, V and F
bits of the EAV and SAV XYZ bytes in the parallel signal just before the
serializer. For line rate, the H bit is used to give a high signal during
horizontal blanking. For progressive formats, the Field/Frame mode uses
the V bit so the output is high during vertical blanking. For interlace and
segmented frame formats, the Field/Frame output uses the F bit so the
output is low during field one and high during field 2. The delay from the
trigger output to the serial signal is approximately 90ns.
Output level
720 mV ± 10%
Into 50 Ω
Rise and fall times,
typical
≤ 135 ps
20% to 80%
Jitter, typical
≤ 10 ps RMS max
Return loss, typical
≥ 15 dB
10 MHz to 300 MHz
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
29
Specifications
Table 41: HD SDI Input
Characteristic
Description
Number of inputs
1
Format
Compatible with SMPTE 292M.
(See Table 55 on page 36.) (See Table 56 on page 36.) (See Table 57 on page 36.)
Input type
75 Ω BNC, internally terminated
Cable loss accommodation
0–20 dB attenuation with 1/SQRT(f) characteristic at 1/2 of serial rate.
Launch amplitude accommodation,
typical
800 mV ± 10% for full specification
Jitter tolerance, typical
0.35 ± 0.1 UI p-p above 1 MHz. Increases proportional to 1/f ≤ 1 MHz to a maximum of
10 UI at low frequencies.
Return loss, typical
≥ 20 dB, 5 MHz to 2.0 GHz
Table 42: Video signal content
Characteristic
Description
Accuracy of synthesizer generated
test signals, typical
0.2%
Signal rise and fall time, 3 Gb
1080p 50, 59.95 and 60 signals with
148.5 MHz Luma pixel rate, typical
Y = 16.6 ns, Cb/Cr = 33.3 ns except for RP219 which has Y, Cb, Cr = 27.5 ns
Signal rise and fall time, 3 Gb and HD
signal with 74.25 MHz and 74.176 MHz
luma pixel rate, typical
Y = 33.3 ns, Cb/Cr = 66.6 ns except for RP219 which has Y, Cb, Cr = 55 ns
30
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Refer to the TG700 User Manual for a full description of the test signals.
Table 43: Signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name
Signals in the signal set
COLOR BAR
100% Color Bars,
75% Color Bars (100% White),
75% Color Bars (75% White)
Description
SMPTE EG1 Color Bars
SMPTE RP219 Color Bars
The −2% patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0% black for
XYZ formats.
SMPTE EG432-1 Color Accuracy
LINEARITY
5 Step Staircase,
10 Step Staircase
These patterns are color-independent so they will appear
differently in YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces.
Valid Ramp,
Y Valid Ramp,
B-Y Valid Ramp,
R-Y Valid Ramp
3 Channel Ramp
This pattern is color-independent, so it will appear differently in
YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces.
Limit Ramp
Shallow Ramp Matrix
Color Ramp Matrix
FLAT FIELD
0% Flat Field (Black),
50% Flat Field,
100% Flat Field (White)
The extended signal sets on the TG700 SW and Documentation
DVD include additional patterns for the remaining 10% increments.
100% Red Field, 100% Green Field,
100% Blue Field, 100% Cyan Field,
100% Magenta Field, 100% Yellow Field
The enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and Documentation
DVD include additional patterns for these six colors at 75% value.
10% Flat Field, 20% Flat Field,
30% Flat Field, 40% Flat Field,
60% Flat Field, 70% Flat Field,
80% Flat Field, 90% Flat Field
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
75% Red Field, 75% Green Field,
75% Blue Field, 75% Cyan Field,
75% Magenta Field, 75% Yellow Field
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
Black to White-1, Black to White-2,
Black to White-3, Black to White-4,
Black to White-5, Black to White-6,
Black to White-7, Black to White-8,
Black to White-9, Black to White-10,
Black to Gray-1, Black to Gray-2,
Black to Gray-3, Black to Gray-4,
Black to Gray-5, Black to Gray-6,
Black to Gray-7, Black to Gray-8,
Black to Gray-9, Black to Gray-10
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
31
Specifications
Table 43: Signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name
Signals in the signal set
Description
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
MULTIBURST
Red-1 Field, Red-2 Field,
Green-1 Field, Green-2 Field,
Blue-1 Field, Blue-2 Field,
Cyan-1 Field, Cyan-2 Field,
Magenta-1 Field, Magenta-2 Field,
Yellow-1 Field, Yellow-2 Field
——
No test signals are currently available for the MULTIBURST signal
set.
SWEEP
Circle, Diagonal Sine,
H Sine, H Sweep, V Sine, V Sweep,
Custom-1, Custom-2
Zone plate test signal with real-time parametric controls.
MONITOR
ChromaDuMonde
Color reference chart, used with permission of DSC Laboratories.
SMPTE 303M Color Reference
Also known as the GretagMacbeth ColorChecker® chart.
Black-White Step Scale,
Black-Dark Gray Step Scale
Pluge and Luma Reference
The −2% patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0% black for
XYZ formats.
Checkerboard
Window
Production Aperture
This pattern is not legal as a broadcast signal.
Clean Aperture
Convergence
PULSE BAR
2T Pulse and Bar
Color Pulses
TIMING
Co-siting Pulse
SDI
Equalizer Test
PLL Test
OTHER
32
SDI Matrix
——
It appears as a 24% gray field in 10-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr formats, but
as different colors in other formats.
For 3G output formats only. Use this button to select the converter
mode of operation. Press any other test signal button to return
to generator mode operation.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 44: Convertor mode embedded audio and ancillary data
Characteristic
Description
Audio data
On Level A, embedded audio from a given input line is passed to the first line derived from that input.
For Level B, the audio is placed on both lines derived from the input.
This effectively doubles the number of audio channels that are active in a level B signal.
Audio control packets
Embedded audio control packets are passed to the output, but when necessary they are delayed a
frame to allow them to be placed on line 9 as specified in SMPTE 299M.
VPID
SMPTE 352 embedded ancillary data on the input is stripped and new SMPTE 352 data that is correct
for the output format is placed on the video outputs as per SMPTE 425M.
SMPTE 352 packets are normally placed immediately after EAV as the first ANC on line 10. If time
code is present, the VPID will be shifted to happen after the ANC timecode.
ANC timecode
Embedded ANC timecode is passed on to the output
Embedded timecode is normally on line 10, but on Level A outputs, line 10 of the input maps to line
19 and 20 on the output. So, in order to prevent delaying the timecode a frame, it is output on line
19. Level B outputs do not have this issue, so timecode passes through on line 10 and is placed
on virtual link A only.
Other ANC data
Embedded ANC such as Closed Caption is passed on to the output
For Level A, embedded data passes on immediately but ends up on a higher line number due to the
conversion mapping. On Level B, the data ends up on the same line number as it was on the input,
and is placed on virtual link A only.
Table 45: Generator mode embedded audio and ancillary data
Characteristic
Description
Generator
embedded audio
Embedded Audio may be inserted in the ancillary data space of the HD and 3 Gb video outputs
Generator ancillary
data
SMPTE 352 Embedded Ancillary Data is placed on the video outputs as per SMPTE 425M
Number of channels
Level A: 16 channels in 4 groups in each link; 8 AES/EBU audio pairs
Level B: 32 channels in 4 groups in each link; 16 AES/EBU audio pairs
Audio tones
Frequency
10 Hz to 20 kHz in half Hz steps
Level
-60 to 0 dBFS in 1 dB steps
User defined ANC
data
Arbitrary Type 2 ANC data packet with user selectable DID (8 bits, 01h-7Fh), SDID (8 bits, 01h-FFh), Data
Count (DC) (numeric, 0-255 words), User Data Words (UDW) (hex, 0-3FF per word). Number of editable
words in string indicated by DC value. User specifiable location (for example, HANC/VANC, line number) for
this packet.
Timecode
ATC-LTC and ATC-VITC can be inserted in the signal as a user-defined time or, if a GPS7 module is present,
the timecode can be the time of day of the GPS7.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
33
Specifications
Table 46: Generator mode – HD-SDI (1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
4:2:2 10b
X
X
60i 23.98p 24p
X
X
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 47: Generator mode – HD-SDI (1280 × 720)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
60i 23.98p 24p
4:2:2 10b
X
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
Table 48: Generator mode – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
YCbCr+A
YCbCr
50i
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:2:2 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
GBR
GBR+A
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 49: Generator mode - 3G Level A (1280 × 720)
Structure
59.94i 50i
60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
YCbCr+A 4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GBR
4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GBR+A
4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
YCbCr
Table 50: Generator mode – 3G Level A (2K × 1080)
Structure
XYZ
GBR
34
50i
4:4:4 12b
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
X
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
X
Specifications
Table 51: Generator mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
YCbCr+A
YCbCr
50i
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:2:2 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
YCbCr+A
GBR
GBR+A
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 52: Generator mode – 3G Level B (2K × 1080)
Structure
XYZ
50i
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
4:4:4 12b
GBR
25p 29.97p 30p
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 53: Generator mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
50i
4:2:2 10b
X
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
X
X
X
X
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 54: Generator mode – 3G Level B (2xHD 1280 × 720)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
4:2:2 10b
60i 23.98p 24p
X
X
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
35
Specifications
Table 55: Converter mode – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080)
1080i
HD Input Signal
50
3 Gb Output Format
50i
59.94
1080p
60
59.94i 60i
23.98
24
25
23.98p 24p
25p
1080i
29.97
30
50
29.97p 30p
50p
59.94
1080psf
60
59.94p 60p
23.98
24
25
29/97
30
23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
Output sample
structure
YCbCr
4:4:4 12b
Not available
10b
YCbCr
4:2:2 12b
10b
GBR
X
X
X
4:4:4 12b
Not available
10b
10b
GBR+A
Table 56: Converter mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)
1080i
HD Input Signal
50
3 Gb Output Format
50i
59.94
1080p
60
59.94 60i
23.98
24
23.98p 24p
25
1080i
29.97
30
25p 29.97p 30p
50
59.94
1080psf
60
23.98
24
25
29/97
30
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
Output sample
structure
YCbCr
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:2:2 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
YCbCr+A
YCbCr
10b
YCbCr+A
GBR
GBR+A
X
X
X
Table 57: Converter mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080)
1080i
HD Input Signal
50
3 Gb Output Format
50i
59.94
1080p
60
59.94i 60i
23.98
24
23.98p 24p
25
1080i
29.97
30
25p 29.97p 30p
50
59.94
1080psf
60
23.98
24
25
29/97
30
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
Output sample
structure
YCbCr
36
4:2:2 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
X
Specifications
Mechanical Characteristics
The following table lists the mechanical characteristics of the HD3G7 module.
Table 58: Mechanical characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Dimensions
Height
41.5 mm (1.63 in)
Width
78.4 mm (3.1 in)
Depth
394 mm (15.5 in)
Weight
340 g (0.75 lb)
Shipping weight
760 g (1.7 lb)
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the HD3G7 module.
Table 59: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C, with 15° C/hour maximum gradient, non-condensing, derated 1° C per 300
m above 1,500 m altitude
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C, with 15° C/hour maximum gradient
Operating
20% to 80% RH (relative humidity) at up to +30° C; Maximum Wet-Bulb Temperature of +29° C
(relative humidity decreases to 20% RH at +50° C)
Non-operating
5% to 90% RH (Relative Humidity) at up to +40° C; Maximum Wet-Bulb Temperature of +40° C
(relative humidity decreases to 55% RH at +50° C)
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet) Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above
1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Vibration
Operating
0.27 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes per axis, three axes
Non-operating
2.28 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes per axis, three axes
Relative
Humidity
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
37
Specifications
HDLG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical, mechanical, and environmental
characteristics of the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
HDLG7 module.
Table 60: 4:2:2 serial digital video signal input
Characteristic
Description
Number of inputs
1
Format
Compatible with SMPTE 292M. (See Table 66.)
Input type
75 Ω BNC
Cable loss accommodation
0-20 dB attenuation with 1/SQRT(f) characteristic at 1/2 of serial rate.
Launch amplitude accommodation,
typical
800 mV ± 10% for full specification 800 mV (plus-min)3 30% up to 20 dB cable attenuation
Jitter tolerance, typical
0.35 ± 0.1 UI p-p above 1 MHz. Increases proportional to 1/f below 1 MHz.
Return loss
≥ 15 dB, 5 MHz to 750 MHz ≥
10 dB, 750 MHz to 1.485 GHz
Table 61: Dual link serial video outputs
Characteristic
Description
Number of outputs
2 on each channel (link)
Format
Compatible with SMPTE 372M and SMPTE 292M
Output type
75 Ω BNC
Output level
800 mV ± 10%
Rise and fall times
270 ps max. (20% to 80%)
Jitter, typical
135 ps max. (0.2 UI alignment jitter)
Return loss
≥ 15 dB, 5 MHz to 750 MHz ≥ 10 dB, 750 MHz to 1.485 GHz
Table 62: Video signal content
Characteristic
Description
Conversion accuracy, typical
0.4%
Accuracy of synthesizer generated
test signals, typical
0.2%
Timing offset of Link B in reference to
Link A
± 200 ns min. Adjustment in steps of the clock period (13.5 ns)
38
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 63: Synthesizer generated HD test signals
Characteristic
Description
Color Bars
100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1,
Linearity
5 Step Staircase, Ramp, Valid Ramp
Flat Field
0% Flat Field, 10% Flat Field, 20% Flat Field, 30% Flat Field, 40% Flat Field, 50% Flat
Field, 60% Flat Field, 70% Flat Field, 80% Flat Field, 90% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field
Monitor
100% Red Field, 75% Red Field, 100% Blue Field, 75% Blue Field, 100% Green Field,
75% Green Field, Convergence
Pulse bar
2T30 Pulse and Bar
SDI
Equalizer Test, PLL Test, SDI Matrix
1
2
2
2
SMPTE RP219 Color Bars refer to SMPTE RP219 Color Bar (I/Q Even).
Not available in 2K-format mode of operation.
Table 64: Synthesizer generated projector test patterns
Characteristic
Color Bars
Description
Color Bar Patch-1
Color Bar Patch-2
The color bar levels are as follows:
Levels
X
Y
Z
White
3794
3960
3890
Yellow
3494
3853
1221
Cyan
2911
3618
3890
Green
2417
3493
1222
Magenta
3289
2421
3814
Red
2901
2171
100
Blue
2014
1416
3816
Black
16
16
16
The color bar levels are as follows:
Levels
X
Y
Z
White
3794
3960
3890
Yellow
3461
3777
2065
Cyan
3085
3590
3756
Green
2767
3493
2325
Magenta
3062
2421
3497
Red
2738
2171
1233
Blue
1800
1416
3203
Black
16
16
16
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
39
Specifications
Table 64: Synthesizer generated projector test patterns (cont.)
Characteristic
Linearity
Description
Step Black to White
Step Black to Dark
Gray
40
Window 10 step staircase signal, which is positioned in the center of the frame or field. It is
20% of the vertical width and 80% of the horizontal width. Each step is at the following levels:
Levels
X
Y
Z
Background
1565
1633
1604
Step1
379
396
389
Step2
759
792
778
Step3
1138
1188
1167
Step4
1518
1584
1556
Step5
1897
1980
1945
Step6
2276
2376
2334
Step7
2656
2772
2723
Step8
3035
3168
3112
Step9
3415
3564
3501
Step10
3794
3960
3890
Window 10 step staircase signal, which is positioned in the center of the frame or field. It is
20% of the vertical width and 80% of the horizontal width. Each step is at the following levels:
Levels
X
Y
Z
Background
122
128
125
Step1
122
128
125
Step2
245
255
251
Step3
367
383
376
Step4
490
511
502
Step5
612
639
627
Step6
734
766
753
Step7
857
894
878
Step8
979
1022
1004
Step9
1101
1150
1129
Step10
1224
1277
1255
Horizontal Gradient
Ramp signal in the horizontal plane with the Y component advancing one level step for
each horizontal pixel across the active line. By using the up/down arrow keys, the Y value
from 16 to 3960 can be observed. The X component value is 0.95808 of the Y component
except a minimum of 16. The Z component value is 0.98232 of the Y component except a
minimum of 16.
Vertical Gradient
Ramp signal in the vertical plane with the Y component advancing one level step for each
vertical pixel (each active line). By using the up/down arrow keys, the Y value from 16 to 3960
can be observed. The X component value is 0.95808 of the Y component except a minimum
of 16. The Z component value is 0.98232 of the Y component except a minimum of 16.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 64: Synthesizer generated projector test patterns (cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Flat Field
Black Flat Field, White Flat Field, Black to White Step-1, Black to White Step-2, Black to
White Step-3, Black to White Step-4, Black to White Step-5, Black to White Step-6, Black to
White Step-7, Black to White Step-8, Black to White Step-9, Black to White Step-10, Black
to Gray Step-1, Black to Gray Step-2, Black to Gray Step-3, Black to Gray Step-4, Black to
Gray Step-5, Black to Gray Step-6, Black to Gray Step-7, Black to Gray Step-8, Black to
Gray Step-9, Black to Gray Step-10 (levels are the same as the levels listed in the Linearity
specification, previously in this table)
Monitor
Red-1 Field, Red-2 Field, Green-1 Field, Green-2 Field, Blue-1 Field, Blue-2 Field, Cyan-1
Field, Cyan-2 Field, Magenta-1 Field, Magenta-2 Field, Yellow-1 Field, Yellow-2 Field, Grid,
Checkerboard, Aspect Ratio (color field levels are the same as the levels listed in the Color
Bars specification, previously in this table)
Pulse Bar
Window
SDI
Equalizer Test, PLL Test, SDI Matrix
Table 65: Embedded audio and ancillary data
Characteristic
Description
Embedded audio
Embedded audio on 4:2:2 video input is placed on the Link A video outputs as per SMPTE
372M. Embedded audio and ancillary data is selectable from the front panel to be inserted
on Link A per SMPTE 372M standard or on Link B or on both for testing purposes.
Ancillary data
Embedded ancillary data on 4:2:2 video input is placed on the Link A video outputs as
per SMPTE 372M.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
41
Specifications
Table 66: Supported input and output formats (SMPTE 274M to SMPTE 372M standards)
Desired output format
Allowed converter input formats
Conversion process
4:2:2 YCbCr 10 bits at fast progressive
rates
50i ! 50P 59.94i ! 59.94p 60i ! 60p
Progressive input formats not supported.
Lines repeated to convert from
interlaced to progressive signal.
4:4:4 YCbCr 10 bits or 4:4:4:4 YCbCrA
10 bits
All 1 (Output format rate and scanning
unchanged from input.)
Additional Cb and Cr samples are
upinterpolated.
Alpha channel content optionally
added.
4:4:4 YCbCr 12 bits
All 1 (Output format rate and scanning
unchanged from input.)
4:4:4 RGB 10 bits or 4:4:4:4 RGBA 10 bits
All 1 (Output format rate and scanning
unchanged from input.)
Additional Cb and Cr samples are
upinterpolated.
Y least significant 2 bits set to zero.
Additional Cb and Cr samples are
upinterpolated.
Linear conversion from YCbCr to
RGB.
Alpha channel content optionally
added.
All 1 (Output format rate and scanning
unchanged from input.)
4:4:4 RGB 12 bits
Additional Cb and Cr samples are
upinterpolated.
Linear conversion from YCbCr to
RGB.
4:2:2 YCbCr 12 bits or 4:2:2:4 YCbCr 12
bits
All 1 (Output format rate and scanning
unchanged from input.)
2K 4:4:4 RGB 12 bits or 2K 4:4:4 XYZ
12 bits
All 1 progressive or segmented up to
30 Hz. Interlaced input at 50, 59.94, or
60 Hz will be considered as 25, 60/1.001,
or 60 segmented.
Least significant 2 bits set to zero.
Alpha channel content optionally
added.
Additional Cb and Cr samples are
upinterpolated.
Linear conversion from YCbCr to
RGB or XYZ as desired.
Flat field “pillar boxes” (64 samples
wide) added to left and right of active
video.
1
42
All indicates 1920 x 1080 30, 30/1.001, 25, 24, and 24/1.001 progressive, PsF or 60, 60/1.001, and 50 interlaced. Note that 30, 30/1.001, and 25 PsF
inputs will be decoded as 60, 60/1.001, and 50 interlace.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Mechanical Characteristics
The following table lists the mechanical characteristics of the HDLG7 module.
Table 67: Mechanical characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Dimensions
Height
41.5 mm (1.63 in)
Width
78.4 mm (3.1 in)
Depth
394 mm (15.5 in)
Weight
340 g (0.75 lb)
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the HDLG7 module.
Table 68: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Non-operating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet) Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above
1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
3.04 m/s2 (0.31 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Non-operating
23.3 m/s2 (2.38 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, Non-operating
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
43
Specifications
HDVG7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the
HDVG7 Generator module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
HDVG7 module.
Table 69: Serial digital video signal outputs
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
2
Bit Rate
1.485 Gbps
Reference information
SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2
1.485/1.001 Gbps
Signal amplitude, typical
800 mV
Rise and fall times,
typical
≤ 270 ps
20% to 80%
Jitter, typical
≤ 135 ps
Alignment jitter
Return loss
≥ 15 dB
5 MHz to 750 MHz
≥ 10 dB
750 MHz to 1.485 GHz
Table 70: Serial digital black signal outputs (Option BK only)
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Connector
BNC
Number of outputs
2
Bit Rate
1.485 Gbps
Reference information
BLACK 1 and BLACK 2
1.485/1.001 Gbps
Signal amplitude, typical
800 mV
Rise and fall times,
typical
≤ 270 ps
20% to 80%
Jitter, typical
≤ 135 ps
Alignment jitter
Return loss
≥ 15 dB
5 MHz to 750 MHz
≥ 10 dB
750 MHz to 1.485 GHz
44
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 71: Embedded audio
Characteristic
Performance requirements
Number of channels
16 channels in 4 groups; 8 AES/EBU
audio pairs
Audio tones
Frequency
Silence to 20 kHz; 31 discrete settings
Level
–60 to 0 dBFS in 1 dB steps
Pre-emphasis
Environmental
Characteristics
Reference information
Emphasis status bits can be inserted.
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the HDVG7 module.
Table 72: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Temperature
Description
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 °C
Non-operating
5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet) Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m
above 1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Operating
3.04 m/s2 (0.31 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Non-operating
23.3 m/s2 (2.38 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 min, three axes
Vibration
Shock, non-operating
294 m/s2 (30 G), half-sine, 11 ms duration
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
45
Specifications
SDI7 Specifications
The following tables list the electrical, mechanical, and environmental
characteristics of the SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator
Module.
Electrical Characteristics
The following tables in this section list the electrical characteristics of the
SDI7 module.
Table 73: Serial video outputs
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Video channels
2
The two channels may be independently set for bit rate, format, color
space, etc.
Video outputs
4, 2 per channel
Channel 1: SIGNAL 1A and SIGNAL 1B connectors
Channel 2: SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B connectors
Format
Supports SD, HD, and
3 Gb signals. Compatible
with SMPTE 125,
SMPTE 259, SMPTE 274,
SMPTE 292, SMPTE 296,
SMPTE 424M,
SMPTE 425M, and
ITU-R BT601
The following tables list the supported formats and sample structures:
(See Table 78 on page 52.) (See Table 79 on page 52.) (See Table 80
on page 52.) (See Table 81 on page 52.) (See Table 82 on page 52.)
(See Table 83 on page 52.) (See Table 84 on page 52.) (See Table 85
on page 53.) (See Table 86 on page 53.) (See Table 87 on page 53.)
(See Table 88 on page 53.)
Output type
75 Ω BNC
Output level
800 mVp-p
Output level variation
with temperature, typical
± 1% typical for 0 to 50°C
Rise and fall times for
HD and 3Gb
135 ps max. (20% to
80%) measured between
runs of at least 3 bits
times of constant level
70 ps typical
Rise and fall times for
SD
400 ps min and 1000 ps
max (20% to 80%)
measured between runs
of at least 3 bits times of
constant level
700 ps typical
3 Gb alignment jitter,
typical
40 ps p-p
0.12 UI
3 Gb timing jitter, typical
80 ps p-p
0.24 UI
HD alignment jitter,
typical
40 ps p-p
0.06 UI
HD timing jitter, typical
80 ps p-p
0.12 UI
46
Reference information
± 3% on level after ringing has settled
18 to 28° C range
Measure on 20 Bit square wave in calibration mode
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 73: Serial video outputs (cont.)
Performance
requirements
Reference information
SD alignment jitter,
typical
200 ps p-p
0.054 UI
SD timing jitter, typical
200 ps p-p
0.054 UI
Return loss, typical
≥ 20 dB
5 MHz to 2.0 GHz
≥ 12 dB
2.0 GHz to 3 GHz
Overshoot, typical
< 1%
DC shift during HD
and 3 Gb mode 32 μs
pathological pattern,
typical
≤ 25 mV
Characteristic
Amount of shift depends on video format. Many 3Gb formats will be less
than ½ of this.
Signal timing, 3 Gb,
HD, and SD when in
“Serial (0H)” based
digital timing mode,
typical
Signals are nominally timed, so that the timing reference point on the
serial output is aligned within 0.5 μs of the reference edge of an analog
reference signal at the same frame rate. Vertically, the first lines with the
broad pulses are aligned.
Timing adjust of lines is in terms of the raster image, so for Level B
signals, this corresponds to ½ of the time for the multiplexed combination
of two lines.
Signal timing, HD and
SD when in “Analog
(DAC)” timing mode,
typical
Signals are nominally timed, so that after the SDI signal is passed through
a D to A conversion, the sync of the resulting analog signal is aligned within
0.5 μs of the reference edge of an analog reference signal at the same
frame rate. Vertically, the first lines with the broad pulses are aligned.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
47
Specifications
Table 74: Trigger / clock output
Characteristic
Performance
requirements
Outputs
1, configurable as system
clock, line, frame, or pixel
clock
Output type
50 Ω output on a 75 Ω
BNC connector
Output level
525 mV ± 10% into 50 Ω
Rise and fall times,
typical
135 ps (20% to 80%)
Jitter, system clock,
typical
5 ps RMS
Jitter, pixel clock, line
and field pulses, typical
20 ps RMS
Return loss, typical
≥ 15 dB
Reference information
The Field/Frame and Line rate signals are derived from the H, V and F
bits of the EAV and SAV XYZ bytes in the parallel signal just before the
serializer. For line rate, the H bit is used to give a high signal during
horizontal blanking. For progressive formats, the Field/Frame mode uses
the V bit so the output is high during vertical blanking. For interlace and
segmented frame formats, the Field/Frame output uses the F bit so the
output is low during field one and high during field 2. The delay from the
trigger to the SDI output varies from 90 ns to 250 ns depending on the
rate and format.
AC coupled
10 MHz to 300 MHz
Table 75: Video signal content
Characteristic
Description
Accuracy of synthesizer generated
test signals, typical
0.2%
Signal rise and fall time, 3 Gb
1080p 50, 59.95 and 60 signals with
148.5 MHz Luma pixel rate, typical
Y, R, G, B = 16.6 ns
Cb/Cr = 33.3 ns except for RP219 which has Y, R, G, B, Cb, Cr = 27.5 ns
Signal rise and fall time, 3 Gb and HD
signal with 74.25 MHz and 74.176 MHz
luma pixel rate, typical
Y, R, G, B = 33.3 ns
Cb/Cr = 66.6 ns except for RP219 which has Y, R, G, B, Cb, Cr = 55 ns
Signal rise and fall time, SD, typical
Y = 200 ns (625), 250 ns (525)
Cb/Cr = 400 ns (625) and 500 ns (525) except for RP219 which has Y, Cb, Cr = 300 ns
typical for both 625 and 525
2T pulse HAD
For 148 MHz Luma pixel rate signals, HAD = 16.66 ns
For 74 MHz Luma pixels rate signals, HAD = 33.33 ns
For SD signals at 13.5 MHz Luma pixel rate, HAD is 200 ns (2T5) for 625 and 250 ns
(2T4) for 525
48
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the
signals that can be selected in the signal set.
Table 76: Signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name
Signals in the signal set
COLOR BAR
100% Color Bars,
75% Color Bars (100% White),
75% Color Bars (75% White)
Description
100% Color Bars Over Red,
75% Color Bars Over Red
These variations on color bars are available only in the 625 50i
format of the SD output mode.
SMPTE EG1 Color Bars
This pattern is only available for YCbCr formats, since the −I and
+Q sections contain color components outside of the legal RGB
gamut. For the SD output mode, this pattern is available only for
the 525-line 59.94i format.
SMPTE RP219 Color Bars
The −2% patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0% black for XYZ
formats. For SD, the color bars are the 4:3 aspect ratio version,
as if converted from the 16:9 image with a center cut.
SMPTE EG432-1 Color Accuracy
LINEARITY
5 Step Staircase,
10 Step Staircase
These patterns are color-independent so they will appear
differently in YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces.
Valid Ramp,
Y Valid Ramp,
B-Y Valid Ramp,
R-Y Valid Ramp
3 Channel Ramp
This pattern is color-independent, so it will appear differently in
YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces.
Limit Ramp
Shallow Ramp Matrix
Color Ramp Matrix
FLAT FIELD
0% Flat Field (Black),
50% Flat Field,
100% Flat Field (White)
The enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and Documentation
DVD include additional patterns for the remaining 10% increments.
100% Red Field, 100% Green Field,
100% Blue Field, 100% Cyan Field,
100% Magenta Field, 100% Yellow Field
The enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and Documentation
DVD include additional patterns for these six colors at 75% value.
10% Flat Field, 20% Flat Field,
30% Flat Field, 40% Flat Field,
60% Flat Field, 70% Flat Field,
80% Flat Field, 90% Flat Field
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
75% Red Field, 75% Green Field,
75% Blue Field, 75% Cyan Field,
75% Magenta Field, 75% Yellow Field
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
49
Specifications
Table 76: Signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name
Signals in the signal set
Description
Black to White-1, Black to White-2,
Black to White-3, Black to White-4,
Black to White-5, Black to White-6,
Black to White-7, Black to White-8,
Black to White-9, Black to White-10,
Black to Gray-1, Black to Gray-2,
Black to Gray-3, Black to Gray-4,
Black to Gray-5, Black to Gray-6,
Black to Gray-7, Black to Gray-8,
Black to Gray-9, Black to Gray-10
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
Red-1 Field, Red-2 Field,
Green-1 Field, Green-2 Field,
Blue-1 Field, Blue-2 Field,
Cyan-1 Field, Cyan-2 Field,
Magenta-1 Field, Magenta-2 Field,
Yellow-1 Field, Yellow-2 Field
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets.
You must install the enhanced signal sets on the TG700 SW and
Documentation DVD to access these signals.
MULTIBURST
For 4:2:2 YCbCr formats, one multiburst pattern consists only of
a Y channel signal, up to the maximum frequency limit, and the
second multiburst pattern is identical for all three channels, up to
half of the Y channel frequency limit.
For 4:4:4 formats, each multiburst pattern is identical for all three
channels.
Multiburst 0.5–2.75 MHz
SD formats only.
Y Multiburst 0.5–5.75 MHz
SD formats only.
Multiburst 1–15 MHz
HD and 3G formats only.
Y Multiburst 15–30 MHz
HD formats only.
Multiburst 15–30 MHz
4:4:4 and fast-progressive 3G formats only.
Y Multiburst 35–60 MHz
Fast-progressive 3G formats only.
SWEEP
Circle, Diagonal Sine,
H Sine, H Sweep, V Sine, V Sweep,
Custom-1, Custom-2
Zone plate test signal with real-time parametric controls.
MONITOR
ChromaDuMonde
Color reference chart, used with permission of DSC Laboratories.
SMPTE 303M Color Reference
Also known as the GretagMacbeth ColorChecker® chart.
Black-White Step Scale,
Black-Dark Gray Step Scale
Pluge and Luma Reference
The −2% patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0% black for
XYZ formats.
Checkerboard
Window
Production Aperture
This pattern is not legal as a broadcast signal.
Clean Aperture
Convergence
50
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Specifications
Table 76: Signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name
Signals in the signal set
Description
PULSE BAR
2T Pulse and Bar
The type of 2T pulse depends on the signal format:
For SD-525 format, this is a 2T4 pulse
For SD-625 format, this is a 2T5 pulse
For HD and slow-progressive 3G formats, this is a 2T30 pulse
For 3G fast progressive formats, this is a 2T60 pulse
For 4:2:2 formats, chroma pulses are at half the bandwidth
Color Pulses
TIMING
Co-siting Pulse
SDI
Equalizer Test
For 10-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr HD-SDI formats, the Y samples carry
the 198h words and the Cb/Cr samples carry the 300h words,
resulting in a magenta-shaded field for this pattern. For other
formats, these same 10-bit word values will result in different color
representations.
PLL Test
It appears as a 24% gray field in 10-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr formats, but
as different colors in other formats.
SDI Matrix
OTHER
Frame Picture
Picture rendered from user-supplied BMP files stored in the
PICTURE directory of the TG700 mainframe memory.
Table 77: Embedded audio and ancillary data
Characteristic
Description
Generator
embedded audio
Embedded Audio may be inserted in the ancillary data space of the SD, HD, and 3 Gb video outputs
Number of audio
channels
SD, HD and Level A 3Gb: 16 channels in 4 groups; 8 AES/EBU audio pairs
Level B 3Gb: 16 channels in 4 groups in each link (32 channels total); 16 AES/EBU audio pairs
Audio tones
10 Hz to 20 kHz in half Hz steps
Audio levels
-60 to 0 dBFS in 1 dB steps
Timecode
ATC-LTC and ATC-VITC can be inserted in the signal as a user-defined time or, if a GPS7 module is present,
the timecode can be the time of day of the GPS7.
Arbitrary ANC
insertion
Arbitrary Type 2 ANC data packet with user selectable DID (8 bits, 01h-7Fh), SDID (8 bits, 01h-FFh), Data
Count (DC) (numeric, 0-255 words), User Data Words (UDW) (hex, 0-3FF per word). Number of editable
words in string indicated by DC value. User specifiable location (for example, HANC/VANC, line number) for
this packet.
Video payload
identifier
SMPTE 352 Video Payload Identifier is placed on the video outputs as per SMPTE 425M
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
51
Specifications
Table 78: SD-525 (720 × 486)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
4:2:2 10b
60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
Table 79: SD-625 (720 × 576)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
4:2:2 10b
X
Table 80: HD-SDI (1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
4:2:2 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 81: HD-SDI (1280 × 720)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
60i 23.98p 24p
4:2:2 10b
X
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
Table 82: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
YCbCr+A
YCbCr
50i
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:2:2 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
GBR
GBR+A
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 83: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1280 × 720)
Structure
59.94i 50i
60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
YCbCr+A 4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GBR
4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GBR+A
4:4:4 10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
YCbCr
Table 84: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (2K × 1080)
Structure
XYZ
GBR
52
50i
4:4:4 12b
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
X
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
X
Specifications
Table 85: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
YCbCr+A
YCbCr
50i
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
25p 29.97p 30p
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:2:2 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
YCbCr+A
GBR
GBR+A
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4:4:4 12b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10b
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 86: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2K × 1080)
Structure
XYZ
50i
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
4:4:4 12b
GBR
25p 29.97p 30p
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 87: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080)
Structure
YCbCr
50i
4:2:2 10b
X
59.94i 60i 23.98p 24p
X
X
X
X
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 88: (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2xHD 1280 × 720)
Structure
YCbCr
59.94i 50i
4:2:2 10b
60i 23.98p 24p
X
X
25p 29.97p 30p
X
X
X
50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
X
X
X
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
53
Specifications
Mechanical
Characteristics
The following table lists the mechanical characteristics of the SDI7 module.
Table 89: Mechanical characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Dimensions
Height
41.5 mm (1.63 in)
Width
78.4 mm (3.1 in)
Depth
394 mm (15.5 in)
Weight
340 g (0.75 lb)
Shipping weight
760 g (1.7 lb)
Environmental
Characteristics
The following table lists the environmental characteristics of the SDI7 module.
Table 90: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Temperature
Operating
0 °C to +50 °C, with 15° C/hour maximum gradient, non-condensing, derated 1° C per 300
m above 1,500 m altitude
Non-operating
–20 °C to +60 °C, with 15° C/hour maximum gradient
Relative
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% RH (relative humidity) at up to +30° C; Maximum Wet-Bulb Temperature of +29° C
(relative humidity decreases to 20% RH at +50° C)
Non-operating
5% to 90% RH (Relative Humidity) at up to +40° C; Maximum Wet-Bulb Temperature of +40° C
(relative humidity decreases to 55% RH at +50° C)
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15,000 feet) Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each 300 m above
1.5 km.
Non-operating
To 15 km (50,000 feet)
Vibration
Operating
0.27 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes per axis, three axes
Non-operating
2.28 Grms), 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes per axis, three axes
54
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
This section provides procedures to verify the performance and functionality of
the TG700 mainframe and related modules.
Performance Verification Preparation
Do the following before starting any of the following performance verification
procedures:
Power On Default Settings
Before you begin a performance verification procedure, you can save your
required instrument settings in the Power On Default preset.
If the instrument settings are saved in the Power On Default preset, you can recall
the settings after the performance verification procedure is completed by turning
off and on the power.
Module Initialization
Perform the following procedure before doing any performance verification
procedures. This will check that the module turns on correctly.
1. Connect the power cord.
2. Check for error messages as the instrument starts and record the results in
the appropriate test record.
3. Run diagnostics:
a. Use the up (▲) arrow button to select UTILITY.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Use the up (▲) arrow button to select Diagnostics.
d. Press the ENTER button and follow the instructions on the display.
e. After the diagnostics testing is complete, press the CANCEL button twice
to exit the Diagnostics menu.
f.
Record the results in the appropriate test record.
4. Load the factory preset:
a. Use the up down (▼) arrow button to select Preset.
b. Press the ENTER button to select RECALL.
c. Press the left (◄) arrow button until Factory Default appears.
d. Press the ENTER button to load the preset.
5. When loading is complete, press the CANCEL button to exit the Factory
Default menu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
55
Performance Verification
Warm Up
The TG700 and test equipment must have had a warm-up period of at least
20 minutes before you start a performance verification procedure.
TG700 Mainframe Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the TG700 TV Signal
Generator Platform mainframe.
Required Equipment
The TG700 and test equipment must have had a warm-up period of at least
20 minutes. The following table lists the required equipment for this procedure.
Table 91: Required Equipment for TG700 mainframe performance verification
Item
No.
Analog genlock module
1
Frequency counter
1
Frequency range: 0.1 Hz to 1250 MHz
Precision: 8 digits or higher
ANRITSU MF 1603A
75 Ω BNC cable
1
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω feed-through
terminator
1
56
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Tektronix AGL7
Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 92: TG700 mainframe test record
Serial Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
1.
Subcarrier Frequency
3.5795418 MHz
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Maximum
3.5795490 MHz
57
Performance Verification
Procedures
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Subcarrier Frequency.
This test verifies the subcarrier frequency accuracy of black burst signals. The
following equipment is required for the test:
Frequency counter
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the subcarrier frequency accuracy
of black burst signals.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through terminator to connect
the BLACK 1 connector on the AGL7 Generator module to the INPUT A
connector on the frequency counter as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2: Equipment connection for verifying subcarrier frequency
2. Set the frequency counter to the frequency measurement mode (if necessary),
and then set the Gate Time to < 2s.
58
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
3. Output the NTSC subcarrier calibration signal as follows:
a. Press MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL ENABLE
simultaneously, and then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons to
restart the instrument in Factory mode.
b. Press MODULE to display the AGL7 main menu.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CAL, and then press
ENTER to access the SIGNAL submenu.
f.
Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC Subcarrier
(1Vp-p), and then press ENTER.
4. Set the frequency counter to trigger on the input, and then verify that the
displayed frequency is within the range of 3.5795418 MHz to 3.5795490 MHz.
This completes the TG700 mainframe performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
AG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the AG7 Audio Generator
module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 93: Required equipment for AG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirements
Recommended equipment
Digital Audio Monitor
1
Oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 200 MHz or higher
Tektronix TDS540D
75 Ω BNC cable
1
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω feed-through
terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
Tektronix 764
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
59
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 94: AG7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
1.
AES/EBU Serial
Digital Audio Output
Level
1+2
900 mV
mV
1100 mV
3+4
900 mV
mV
1100 mV
5+6
900 mV
mV
1100 mV
7+8
900 mV
mV
1100 mV
900 mV
mV
1100 mV
2.1V
OK
2.
SILENCE Output
Level
3.
48 kHz Clock
Output Level
(CMOS compatible)
60
High
Low
OK
0.8V
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Procedures
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
Performance verification procedures can be performed individually if desired.
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Serial Digital Audio Outputs.
This test verifies that serial digital audio signals are output correctly from the 1+2,
3+4, 5+6, 7+8, and SILENCE connectors. The following equipment is required
for this test:
Oscilloscope
Digital audio monitor
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify that serial digital audio signals are
output correctly from the 1+2, 3+4, 5+6, 7+8, and SILENCE connectors.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through terminator to connect the
1+2 connector on the AG7 Generator module to the oscilloscope CH1 input
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3: Initial equipment connection for verifying the serial digital audio outputs
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
61
Performance Verification
2. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
200 mV/div
Horizontal
100 ns/div
Acquire
Sample
Trigger position
50%
Trigger slope
Rising Edge
Input impedance
1 MΩ
Measure
Amplitude
3. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the TG700 main menu.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
c. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press ENTER to recall the factory default settings.
4. Use the oscilloscope to measure that the signal amplitude is within the range
of 900 mV to 1100 mV.
5. Change the BNC cable connection from the 1+2 connector to the 3+4
connector on the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
6. Change the BNC cable connection from the 3+4 connector to the 5+6
connector on the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
7. Change the BNC cable connection from the 5+6 connector to the 7+8
connector on the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
8. Change the BNC cable connection from the 7+8 connector to the SILENCE
connector on the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
9. Change the BNC cable connection from the SILENCE connector to the 1+2
connector on the AG7 Generator module.
10. Disconnect the BNC cable and the 75 Ω terminator from the oscilloscope
CH1 input connector, and then connect the BNC cable to the CH1-2 BNC
connector on the digital audio monitor rear panel as shown in the following
figure.
11. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the other loop through to the
CH1-2 BNC connector on the digital audio monitor rear panel.
62
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Figure 4: Second equipment connection for verifying the serial digital audio outputs
12. On the digital audio monitor front panel, press MENU to display the menu.
13. Select the Input item from the menu, and select CH1-2 input:
BNC-unbalanced item from the submenu.
14. On the digital audio monitor front panel, press CLEAR to clear the menu.
15. On the digital audio monitor front panel, press CH STATUS to display
CHANNEL STATUS view.
16. In the view, check that CRC errors are not displayed.
17. On the digital audio monitor front panel, press Audio View.
18. Verify that the digital audio monitor bar graphs show both Channel 1 and
Channel 2 at –20 dBfs.
19. Change the BNC cable connection from the 1+2 connector to the 3+4
connector on the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 12 tostep 18.
20. Change the BNC cable connection from 3+4 connector to 5+6 connector on
the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 12 to step 18.
21. Change the BNC cable connection from 5+6 connector to 7+8 connector on
the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 12 to step 18.
22. Change the BNC cable connection from 7+8 connector to SILENCE
connector on the AG7 Generator module and repeat step 12 to step 18.
48 kHz Clock Output.
This test verifies that 48 kHz clock signal are output correctly from the 48 kHz
CLOCK connector. The following equipment is required for this test:
Oscilloscope
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
63
Performance Verification
Perform the following procedure to verify that 48 kHz clock signal is output
correctly from the 48 kHz CLOCK connector.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through terminator to connect the
48 kHz CLOCK connector on the AG7 Generator module to the oscilloscope
CH1 input as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5: Equipment connection for verifying the 48 kHz clock output
2. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
500 mV/div
Horizontal
10 μs/div
Record Length
1000
Acquire menu
Sample
Trigger position
50%
Trigger slope
Rising Edge
Input impedance
1 MΩ
Measure
Amplitude
3. Use the oscilloscope to measure that the signal amplitude is as follows:
Low: < 0.8 V
High: > 2.1 V
This completes the AG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
64
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
AGL7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the AGL7 Analog Genlock
module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 95: Required equipment for AGL7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 200 MHz or higher
Tektronix TDS540D
Video measurement set
1
Tektronix VM700T Option 01/11
Waveform vector monitor
1
Tektronix 1765
TV signal generator
1
Tektronix TG700 with AGL7 Analog
Genlock module
Frequency counter
1
Frequency range: 0.1 Hz to 1250 MHz
Precision: 7 digits or higher
ANRITSU MF 1603A
75 Ω BNC cable
4
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω feed-through
terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial terminator
2
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
65
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 96: AGL7 test record
Serial Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
BLACK 1
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 2
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 3
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 1 (Peak to
Peak Value)
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 2 (Peak to
Peak Value)
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 3 (Peak to
Peak Value)
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 1
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 2
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 3
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
Black Output (NTSC)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Blanking Level
Burst Amplitude
Sync Amplitude
3.5795444 MHz
Subcarrier
Frequency
3.5795464 MHz
Tri-Level Sync Output
4.
5.
6.
66
Blanking Level
BLACK 2
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 3
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
Sync Amplitude
plus
BLACK 2
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 3
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
Sync Amplitude
minus
BLACK 2
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 3
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the AGL7 Analog Genlock module is
operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Genlock Function.
This test verifies that the genlock function is operating correctly. The following
equipment is required for the test:
TV signal generator (TG700 mainframe with AGL7 module)
Waveform vector monitor
Four 75 Ω BNC cables
Three 75 Ω coaxial terminators
Perform the following procedure to verify that the genlock function is functioning
correctly.
1. Use a 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the CW connector on the AGL7
Genlock module to the BLACK 2 connector on the TV signal generator
(AGL7 module) as shown in the following figure.
2. Use a 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the REF connector on the AGL7
Genlock module to the BLACK 1 connector on the TV signal generator
(AGL7 module) as shown in the following figure. (See Figure 6.)
3. Use a 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the other REF connector on the AGL7
Genlock module to the A connector on the waveform vector monitor as shown
in the following figure. (See Figure 6.)
4. Use a 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the BLACK 1 connector on the AGL7
Genlock module to the B connector on the waveform vector monitor rear
panel as shown in the following figure. (See Figure 6.)
5. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminators to terminate the A and B loop through
connectors on the waveform vector monitor rear panel.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
67
Performance Verification
Figure 6: Equipment connections for verifying the genlock function
6. Set the TV signal generator (AGL7 module) settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Signal format
PAL
Test signal
Black Burst
7. Set the waveform vector monitor settings as follows:
Control
Setting
CONFIG
REFERENCE
NTSC EXTREF: A
PAL EXTREF :B
DISPLAY
VECTOR
INPUT
CH-A and CH-B
OVERLAY
ON
EXT REF
OFF
8. Press the GAIN menu button on the waveform vector monitor front panel to
display the Gain menu.
9. In the Gain menu, select X5 and VARIABLE.
10. Align the PAL burst vector with the compass rose of the display.
68
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
11. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the TG700 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press ENTER to recall the factory default settings.
12. Set the genlock source and output signal of the AGL7 Genlock module as
follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AGL7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GENLOCK, and
then press ENTER to access the GENLOCK submenu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select PAL Burst, and
then press ENTER.
d. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
e. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
f.
Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
g. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select PAL, and then press
ENTER to access the SIGNAL menu.
h. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst, and
then press ENTER.
i.
Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
13. Verify that the displayed vector display is locked and the EXT.REF LED on
the TG700 mainframe front panel lights.
14. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC Burst, and
then press ENTER.
15. Verify that the vector display is unlocked.
16. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 625 SYNC, and then
press ENTER.
17. Verify that the vector display is locked.
18. Change the signal format setting of the TV signal generator (AGL7 module)
to NTSC.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
69
Performance Verification
19. Change the AGL7 Genlock module settings as follows:
a. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC Burst, and
then press ENTER.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC, and then
press ENTER to access the SIGNAL menu.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC Burst, and
then press ENTER.
f.
Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
20. Verify that the displayed vector display (CH-B) is locked and the EXT.REF
LED on the TG700 mainframe front panel lights.
21. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select PAL Burst, and then
press ENTER.
22. Verify that the vector display is unlocked.
23. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 525 SYNC, and then
press ENTER.
24. Verify that the vector display is locked.
25. Output NTSC subcarrier signal from the TV signal generator (AGL7 module)
as follows:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL
ENABLE buttons on the TV signal generator (TG700) simultaneously
until TG700 Preset appears in the display, then release the MODULE
and FORMAT buttons to restart the instrument in Factory mode.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CAL, and then press
ENTER to access the SIGNAL submenu.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC Subcarrier
(1Vp-p), and then press ENTER.
26. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CW, and then press
ENTER.
27. Verify that the displayed vector display is locked and the EXT.REF LED on
the TG700 mainframe front panel lights.
70
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
28. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 2 connector to BLACK 3
connector on the TV signal generator (AGL7 module).
29. Set the TV signal generator (AGL7 module) so that 1080 59.94i trilevel sync
signal is output from the BLACK 3 connector.
30. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select HD SYNC, and then
press ENTER.
31. Verify that the displayed vector display is locked and the EXT.REF LED on
the TG700 mainframe front panel lights.
Trilevel Sync Outputs.
This test verifies the blanking level and sync amplitude of trilevel sync signals.
The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the blanking level and sync amplitude
of trilevel sync signals.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through terminator to connect
the BLACK 2 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module to the oscilloscope
CH1 input as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7: Equipment connection for verifying the trilevel sync outputs
2. Select the HD SYNC (SAME AS BLACK3) signal for BLACK 2 as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 2, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
71
Performance Verification
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select HD SYNC (SAME
AS BLACK3), and then press ENTER.
d. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
3. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
50 mV/div
Vertical offset
0V
Horizontal
500 ns/div
Horizontal position
Center
Trig Position
50%
Trig slope
Rising Edge
Acquire menu
Average 32
4. Verify that the blanking level is within the range of +50 mV to –50 mV.
5. Change the oscilloscope vertical scale to 10mV/div.
6. Align the blanking level with the center graticule line on the oscilloscope.
7. Change the oscilloscope vertical offset to 300 mV.
8. Verify that the high level of the signal (sync amplitude plus) is within the
range of +0.6 div to –0.6 div to the center graticule (except for ringing of
the rising edge).
9. Change the oscilloscope vertical offset to –300 mV.
10. Verify that the low level of the signal (sync amplitude minus) is within the
range of +0.6 div to –0.6 div to the center graticule (except for ringing of
the falling edge).
11. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK
3 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module and repeat steps 4 through 10.
Black Burst Outputs.
This test verifies the blanking level, burst amplitude, and sync amplitude of black
burst signals. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the blanking level, burst amplitude, and
sync amplitude of black burst signals.
72
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Move the BNC cable connection from BLACK 3 connector to the BLACK 1
connector on the AGL7 Genlock module.
2. Select the NTSC Black Burst signal for BLACK 2 and BLACK 3 as follows:
a. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 2, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC, and then
press ENTER to access the SIGNAL submenu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst, and
then press ENTER.
d. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 3, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
f.
Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BB (SAME AS
BLACK2), and then press ENTER.
g. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
3. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
50 mV/div
Vertical offset
0V
Horizontal
1 μs/div
Horizontal position
Center
Trig position
10%
Acquire menu
Average 32
Measure menu
Mean
Trig type
Video
Trig standard
NTSC
Trig source
CH1
Trig polarity
Negative
Trig field
Odd Field
Trig line
2
Trig mode
MONO (2 Field)
4. Verify that the blanking level is within the range of +50 mV to –50 mV.
5. Move the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module and repeat step 4.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
73
Performance Verification
6. Move the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK
3 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module and repeat step 4.
7. Move the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 3 connector to the BLACK
1 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module.
8. Disconnect the BNC cable from the 75 Ω feed-through terminator on the
oscilloscope input, and then connect the BNC cable to the CHAN A connector
on the video measurement set as shown in the following figure. (See Figure 8.)
9. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the other loop through to the
CHAN A connector on the video measurement set.
Figure 8: Equipment connection for verifying burst and sync amplitude
10. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
11. Touch the Mode soft key to set the instrument to Analog mode, and then
touch the H_Timing soft key.
12. Press the Menu button to display the H_Timing main menu.
13. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value
to 32.
14. Touch the RS-170A soft key.
15. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
16. Verify that the burst and sync amplitude are within the range of 280.0 mV
to 291.4 mV.
74
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
17. Move the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module and repeat step 16.
18. Move the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK
3 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module and repeat step 16.
Subcarrier Frequency.
This test verifies the subcarrier frequency accuracy of black burst signals. The
following equipment is required for the test:
Frequency counter
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the subcarrier frequency accuracy of
the black burst signals.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through terminator to connect
the BLACK 1 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module to the INPUT A
connector on the frequency counter as shown in the following figure.
Figure 9: Equipment connection for verifying subcarrier frequency
2. Set the frequency counter to the frequency measurement mode (if necessary),
and then set the Gate Time to < 2s.
3. Output the NTSC subcarrier calibration signal as follows:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL
ENABLE buttons simultaneously until TG700 Preset appears in the
display, then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons to restart the
instrument in Factory mode.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press ENTER to access the OUTPUT submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CAL, and then press
ENTER to access the SIGNAL submenu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
75
Performance Verification
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC Subcarrier
(1Vp-p), and then press ENTER.
f.
Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
4. Set the frequency counter to trigger on the input, and then verify that the
displayed frequency is within the range of 3.5795444 MHz to 3.5795464 MHz.
48 kHz Clock Output (Serial number J320101 and above only).
This test verifies that the 48 kHz clock signal is output correctly from the CW
(48 KHz CLOCK) connector. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
75 Ω BNC cable
Perform the following procedure to verify that the 48 kHz clock signal is output
correctly from the CW (48 KHz CLOCK) connector.
1. Disconnect the power cable from the TG700 mainframe.
2. Remove the AGL7 Genlock module from the TG700 mainframe.
3. Change internal cabling to output the 48 kHz clock signal from the CW
connector:
a. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the connector labeled J040 on the
circuit board. (See Figure 10.)
b. Reconnect the cable to the connector labeled J960 on the circuit board.
(See Figure 10.)
Figure 10: Location of the J040 and J960 connectors
4. Install the AGL7 Genlock module into the TG700 mainframe.
5. Connect the power cable to the TG700 mainframe.
76
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
6. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the CW (48 kHz CLOCK) connector
on the AGL7 Genlock module to the oscilloscope CH1 input as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 11: Equipment connection for verifying the 48 kHz clock output
7. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
1 V/div
Horizontal
10 μs/div
Horizontal position
Center
Trig position
50%
Trig source
Rising Edge
Acquire menu
Sample
Input impedance
1 MW
Measure
High and Low
8. Use the oscilloscope to measure that the signal amplitude is as follows:
Low: < 0.8 V
High: > 2.1 V
This completes the AGL7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
77
Performance Verification
ATG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the ATG7 Analog Test
Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 97: Required equipment for ATG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 200 MHz or higher
Tektronix TDS540D
Video measurement set
1
75 Ω BNC cable
1
75 Ω feed-through
terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
78
Tektronix VM700T Option 01/11
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 98: ATG7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
SIGNAL Output (Tested format: NTSC)
1.
Luminance Amplitude
(Measured on 75%
Color Bars signal)
707.2 mV
mV
721.0 mV
2.
Chrominance to
Luminance Gain Ratio
(Measured on FCC
Composite signal)
–1.0%
%
1.0%
3.
Chrominance to
Luminance Delay
(Measured on FCC
Composite signal)
——
ns
10 ns
4.
Differential Phase and
Gain (Measured on
Modulated 5 Step
signal)
Gain
——
OK
0.5%
Phase
——
OK
0.5 °
SIGNAL Output (Tested format: PAL)
5.
Luminance Amplitude
(Measured on 75%
color Bars signal)
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
6.
Chrominance to
Luminance Gain
Ratio (Measured on
CCIR17 signal)
–1.0%
%
1.0%
7.
Chrominance to
Luminance Delay
(Measured on
CCIR17 signal)
——
ns
10 ns
8.
Differential Phase and
Gain (Measured on
Modulated 5 Step
signal)
Gain
——
OK
0.5%
Phase
——
OK
0.5 °
9.
Luminance Linearity
Error (Measured on 5
Step signal)
——
10.
Frequency Response
(to 5.0 MHz)
(Measured on 100%
Multiburst signal)
–1.0%
1.0%
OK
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
1.0%
79
Performance Verification
Table 98: ATG7 test record (cont.)
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
BARS Output (Tested format: PAL)
11.
Luminance Gain
(Measured on 75%
color Bar Over Red
signal)
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
12.
Chrominance Gain
(Measured on 75%
color Bar Over Red
signal)
650.6 mV
mV
677.0 mV
BLACK 1 (Peak to
Peak value)
900 mV
mV
1100 mV
BLACK 2 (Peak to
Peak value)
900 mV
mV
1100 mV
BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 Outputs
13.
Timing Pulse
Amplitude
SIGNAL, BARS, BLACK 1, and BLACK2 Outputs (Common function)
14.
15.
16.
80
Blanking Level
Burst Amplitude
Sync Amplitude
SIGNAL
–50 mV
mV
50 mV
BARS
–50 mV
mV
50 mV
BLACK 1
–50 mV
mV
50 mV
BLACK 2
–50 mV
mV
50 mV
SIGNAL (Peak to
Peak value)
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BARS (Peak to
Peak value)
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 1 (Peak to
Peak value)
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 2 (Peak to
Peak value)
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
SIGNAL
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BARS
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 1
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 2
280 mV
mV
291.4 mV
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the ATG7 Analog Test Generator module
is operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Timing Pulse Outputs (Black 1 an Black 2).
This test verifies the pulse amplitude of the H drive signal from the BLACK 1 and
BLACK 2 outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the pulse amplitude signal from the
BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through terminator to connect
the BLACK 1 connector on the ATG7 Generator module to the oscilloscope
CH1 input as shown in the following figure.
Figure 12: Equipment connection for verifying pulse amplitude
2. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the TG700 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press ENTER to recall the factory default settings.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
81
Performance Verification
3. Select the H Drive signal for BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the ATG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and
then press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC, and then
press ENTER.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select H Drive, and then
press ENTER.
f.
Press the CANCEL button twice to return the module main menu.
g. Repeat parts b through d of this step to select the H Drive signal for
BLACK 2.
4. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
200 mV/div
Vertical offset
0V
Horizontal
200 ns/div
Horizontal position
Center
Trig position
50%
Trig source
Rising Edge
Acquire menu
Average 32
Measure
Peak to peak
5. Verify that the pulse amplitude is within the range of 0.900 V to 1.100V.
6. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2
connector on the ATG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
Black Burst Outputs.
This test verifies the blanking level, burst amplitude, and sync amplitude of black
burst signals. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
Video measurement set
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
82
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Perform the following procedure to verify the blanking level, burst amplitude, and
sync amplitude of black burst signals.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK 1
connector on the ATG7 Generator module.
2. Select the Black Burst signal for BLACK 1, BLACK 2, and BARS as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the module main menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and
then press ENTER.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC, and then
press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst, and
then press ENTER.
e. Press the CANCEL button twice to return the module main menu.
f.
Repeat parts b to e of this step to select the NTSC black burst signal for
BLACK 2 and BARS.
3. Select the Black Burst signal for SIGNAL as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
b. Press the FLAT FIELD button to select Black Burst.
4. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
50 mV/div
Vertical offset
0V
Horizontal
1 μs/div
Horizontal position
Center
Trig position
10%
Acquire menu
Average 32
Measure menu
Mean
Trig type
Video
Trig standard
NTSC
Trig source
CH1
Trig polarity
Negative
Trig field
Odd Field
Trig line
2
Trig mode
MONO (2 Field)
5. Verify that the blanking level is within the range of –50 mV to +50 mV.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
83
Performance Verification
6. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2
connector on the ATG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
7. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 2 connector to the SIGNAL connector
on the ATG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
8. Move the BNC cable from the SIGNAL connector to the BARS connector
on the ATG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
9. Move the BNC cable from the BARS connector to the BLACK 1 connector
on the ATG7 Generator module.
10. Disconnect the BNC cable from the 75 Ω feed-through terminator on the
oscilloscope input, and then connect the BNC cable to the CHAN A connector
on the video measurement set as shown in the following figure.
11. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the other loop through to the
CHAN A connector on the video measurement set.
Figure 13: Equipment connection for verifying burst and sync amplitude
12. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
13. Touch the Mode soft key to set the instrument to Analog mode, and then
touch the H_Timing soft key.
14. Press the Menu button to display the H_Timing main menu.
15. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value
to 32.
16. Touch the RS-170A soft key.
17. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
84
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
18. Verify that the burst and sync amplitude are within the range of 39.2 IRE
to 40.8 IRE.
19. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2
connector on the ATG7 Generator module and repeat step 16.
20. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 2 connector to the SIGNAL connector
on the ATG7 Generator module and repeat step 16.
21. Move the BNC cable from the SIGNAL connector to the BARS connector on
the ATG7 Generator module and repeat step 16.
Luminance and Chrominance Gain (BARS Output).
This test verifies the luminance and chrominance gain of the 75% color bar over
red signal from the BARS output. The following equipment is required for the test:
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the luminance and chrominance gain of
the 75% color bar over red signal from the BARS output.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Select the 75% Color Bar Over Red signal for BARS as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the ATG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BARS, and then
press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select PAL, and then
press ENTER.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 75% Color Bar
Over Red, and then press ENTER.
2. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
3. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as PAL.
4. In the Measure mode display, touch the Color Bar soft key to open the Color
Bar measurement display.
5. Press the Menu button to display the Color Bar main menu.
6. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value to
256.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
85
Performance Verification
7. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
8. Verify that the luminance gain (level) is within the range of 693.0 mV to
707.0 mV.
9. Verify that the chrominance gain (level) is within the range of 650.6 mV to
677.0 mV. Note that the chrominance gain is measured by Red.
Luminance Amplitude (SIGNAL Output).
This test verifies the luminance amplitude of the 75% color bars signal (for NTSC)
and the 75% color bars signal (for PAL) from the SIGNAL output.
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the luminance amplitude of the 75%
color bars signal (for NTSC) and the 75% color bars signal (for PAL) from the
SIGNAL output.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
NTSC Format.
1. Move the BNC cable from the BARS connector to the SIGNAL connector on
the ATG7 Generator module.
2. Select the 75% Color Bars signal for SIGNAL as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the ATG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
c. Press the COLOR BAR button to select 75% Color Bars.
3. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
4. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as NTSC.
5. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
6. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value to
256.
7. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
8. Verify that the luminance gain (level) is within the range of 707.2 mV to
721.0 mV.
86
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
PAL Format.
1. Select the 75% Color Bars signal for SIGNAL as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button to select PAL, and then press ENTER.
b. Press the COLOR BAR button to select 75% Color Bars.
2. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
3. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as PAL.
4. In the Measure mode display, touch the Color Bar soft key to open the Color
Bar measurement display.
5. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
6. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
7. Verify that the luminance gain (level) is within the range of 693.0 mV to
707.0 mV.
Chrominance to Luminance Gain and Delay (SIGNAL Output). This test verifies
the chrominance to luminance gain and delay of the FCC composite signal (for
NTSC) and the CCIR17 signal (for PAL) from the SIGNAL output.
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the chrominance to luminance gain
and delay of the FCC composite signal (for NTSC) and the CCIR17 signal (for
PAL) from the SIGNAL output.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
NTSC Format.
1. Select the FCC Composite signal for SIGNAL as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
b. Press the OTHER button to select FCC Composite.
2. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
3. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as NTSC.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
87
Performance Verification
4. In the Measure mode display, touch the ChromLum GainDelay soft key to
open the chrominance to luminance gain and delay measurement display.
5. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
6. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
7. Verify that the chrominance gain is 100% ±1%.
8. Verify that the chrominance delay is within the range of –10 ns to + 10 ns.
PAL Format.
9. Select the CCIR 17 signal for SIGNAL as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button to select PAL, and then press ENTER.
b. Press the OTHER button to select CCIR 17.
10. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
11. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as PAL.
12. In the Measure mode display, touch the ChromLum GainDelay soft key to
open the chrominance to luminance gain and delay measurement display.
13. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
14. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
15. Verify that the chrominance gain is 100% ±1%.
16. Verify that the chrominance delay is within the range of –10 ns to + 10 ns.
Differential Phase and Gain (SIGNAL Output). This test verifies the differential
phase and gain of the modulated 5 step signal from the SIGNAL output.
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the differential phase and gain of the
modulated 5 step signal from the SIGNAL output.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
88
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
NTSC Format.
1. Select the Modulated 5 Step signal for SIGNAL as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
b. Press the LINEARITY button to select Modulated 5 Step.
2. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
3. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as NTSC.
4. In the Measure mode display, touch the DGDP soft key to open the differential
gain and phase measurement display.
5. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
6. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
7. Verify that the p-p/max value of the differential gain is less than or equal
to 0.5%.
8. Verify that the peak to peak value of the differential phase is less than or
equal to 0.5 degree.
PAL Format.
9. Press the FORMAT button to select PAL, and then press ENTER.
10. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
11. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as PAL.
12. In the Measure mode display, touch the DGDP soft key to open the differential
gain and phase measurement display.
13. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
14. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
15. Verify that the p-p/max value of the differential gain is less than or equal
to 0.5%.
16. Verify that the peak to peak value of the differential phase is less than or
equal to 0.5 degree.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
89
Performance Verification
Luminance Linearity Error (SIGNAL Output). This verifies the luminance linearity
error of the 5 step signal from the SIGNAL output.
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the luminance linearity error of the
5 step signal from the SIGNAL output.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Press the LINEARITY button to select 5 Step.
2. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
3. In the Measure mode display, touch the Luminance Non Linearity soft key
to open the luminance non linearity measurement display.
4. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
5. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
6. Verify that p-p value of the luminance non linearity is within the range of
–1.0% to 1.0%.
Frequency Response (SIGNAL Output). This verifies the frequency response of the
multiburst signal from the SIGNAL output.
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the frequency response of the multiburst
signal from the SIGNAL output.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Press the MULTIBURST button to select 100% Multiburst.
2. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
3. In the Measure mode display, touch the Multiburst soft key to open the
multiburst measurement display.
4. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
90
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
5. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
6. Verify that the amplitude is within the range of –0.08 dB to +0.08 dB
(0.5 MHz to 4.8 MHz).
This completes the ATG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
AVG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the AVG7 Analog Video
Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 99: Required equipment for AVG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 1 GHz or higher
Tektronix TDS784D
Video measurement set
1
Digital multimeter
1
Peak detector amplifier
1
Tektronix part number 015-0408-00 and
TM500 series power supply
Peak detector head
1
Tektronix part number 015-0413-00
Color picture monitor
1
SONY BVMD14H5J and BKM129X
Test signal generator
1
Tektronix ATG7
75 Ω BNC cable
3
Length: 72 inches
75 Ω BNC cable
1
5C-2V, 1 m
75 Ω feed-through
termination
1
Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial termination
1
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
75 Ω signal adapter
2
BNC T connector
1
Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female-to-dual
banana adapter
1
Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
BNC female-to-female
connector
1
Canare BCJ-J
Tektronix VM700T Option 01/11
5 1/2 digits
Bandwidth: 1 GHz Amplitude precision:
–3 dB
FLUKE 8842A
Tektronix part number 012-0159-01
Canare DH5C01-S-SA
Tektronix AMT75
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
91
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 100: AVG7 test record
Serial
number
Cal date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal data
Maximum
1.
Absolute Amplitude
CH 1 Output
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
CH 2 Output
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
CH 3 Output
mV
707.0 mV
%
0.5%
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
92
Channel Gain
Matching (Relative
to CH 1)
CH 2 Output
693.0 mV
——
CH 3 Output
——
%
0.5%
DC Offset
CH 1 Output (GBR)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 2 Output (GBR)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 3 Output (GBR)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 2 Output (YPbPr)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 3 Output (YPbPr)
–10 mV
10 mV
Channel-to-Channel
Delay (Relative to
CH 1)
CH 2 Output
–1.0 ns
mV
ns
1 ns
CH 3 Output
–1.0 ns
ns
1 ns
Frequency
Response
(Measured on DAC
test signal)
CH 1 Output (Peak
value from 0.5 MHz to
5 MHz)
–3.5 mV
mV
3.5 mV
CH 2 Output (Peak
value from 0.5 MHz to
5 MHz)
–3.5 mV
mV
3.5 mV
CH 3 Output (Peak
value from 0.5 MHz to
5 MHz)
–3.5 mV
mV
3.5 mV
Chrominance to
Luminance Gain
Ratio (Measured on
DAC test signal)
CH 1 Output ≤ 1.0%
–1.0%
%
1.0%
CH 2 Output ≤ 1.0%
–1.0%
%
1.0%
CH 3 Output ≤ 1.0%
–1.0%
%
1.0%
Line Time Distortion
(Measured on
NTSC: FCC
Composite signal)
CH 1 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 2 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
——
%
0.5%
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Table 100: AVG7 test record (cont.)
Serial
number
Cal date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Cal data
Maximum
8.
Field Time
Distortion
(Measured on
Field Square
Wave signal of all
composite outputs)
Minimum
——
%
0.5%
CH 2 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 1 Output (K-2T) ≤
0.5% (Peak to Peak
value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 2 Output (K-2T) ≤
0.5% (Peak to Peak
value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output (K-2T) ≤
0.5% (Peak to Peak
value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 1 Output (K-PB)
≤ 0.5% (Peak to Peak
value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 2 Output (K-PB)
≤ 0.5% (Peak to Peak
value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output (K-PB)
≤ 0.5% (Peak to Peak
value)
——
%
0.5%
CH 1 Output (DG) ≤
0.5%
——
%
0.5%
CH 2 Output (DG) ≤
0.5%
——
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output (DG) ≤
0.5%
——
%
0.5%
CH 1 Output (DP) ≤
0.5°
——
°
0.5°
CH 2 Output (DP) ≤
0.5°
——
°
0.5°
CH 3 Output (DP) ≤
0.5°
——
°
0.5°
9.
10.
K Factor 2T5 Pulse
(Measured on
CCIR17 & FCC
Composite signal)
Differential
Phase and Gain
(Measured on
Modulated 5 Step
signal)
CH 1 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
93
Performance Verification
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the AVG7 Analog Video Generator module
is operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
DC Offset and Amplitude Error.
This test verifies the DC offset and amplitude error of the channel outputs. The
following equipment is required for the test:
Digital multimeter
BNC female-to-dual banana adapter
BNC T connector
75 Ω coaxial termination
75 Ω BNC cable
Perform the following procedure to verify the output offset and gain of the
channel outputs:
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, BNC T connector, 75 Ω coaxial termination, and
BNC female-to-dual banana adapter to connect the upper CH 1 connector
on the AVG7 Generator module to the INPUT connector on the digital
multimeter as shown in the following figure.
Figure 14: Equipment connection for verifying the DC offset and amplitude error
2. Press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL ENABLE buttons
simultaneously, and then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons to
restart the instrument in Factory mode. Continue holding down the FRONT
PANEL ENABLE button until the “TG700 start up with Factory Mode.”
message appears.
94
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
3. Select the DAC Gain (GBR): 0 mV calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (GBR),
and then press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then
press ENTER.
4. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV. Note this
value as CH1_DC0.
5. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
6. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV. Note this
value as CH2_DC0.
7. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
8. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV. Note this
value as CH3_DC0.
9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
10. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 700.397mV, and then
press ENTER.
11. Read the value on the digital multimeter, and note this value as CH1_DC1.
12. CH1_DC1CH1_DC0 CH1_V1 CH1_DC0 CH1_V1
13. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
14. Read the value on the digital multimeter, and note this value as CH2_DC1.
15. CH2_DC1CH2_DC0 CH2_V1 CH2_DC0 CH2_V1
16. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
17. Read the value on the digital multimeter, and note this value as CH3_DC1.
18. Verify that CH3_DC1−CH3_DC0 is within the range of 693.0 mV to 707.0
mV. Note this value as CH3_V1.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
95
Performance Verification
19. Verify that the amplitude errors of the CH 2 and CH 3 outputs meet the
following relationships:
CH 2 amplitude error = ((CH2_V1/CH1_V1)−1)×100≤ ±0.5%
CH 3 amplitude error = ((CH3_V1/CH1_V1)-1)×100≤ ±0.5%
20. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
21. Select the DAC Gain (YPbPr) : 0 mV calibration signal for CH 2 and
CH 3 as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to display the CALIBRATION menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (YPbPr),
and then press ENTER.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then
press ENTER.
22. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV.
23. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
24. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV.
Channel-to-Channel Delay.
This test verifies the time delay among the channel outputs. The following
equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
Test signal generator
Two 75 Ω signal adapters
75 Ω feed-through termination
Three 75 Ω BNC cables
Perform the following procedure to verify the time delay among the channel
outputs:
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω signal adapter to connect the upper
CH 1 connector on the AVG7 Generator module to the CH 1 input connector
on the oscilloscope as shown in the following figure. (See Figure 15.)
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω signal adapter to connect the upper
CH 2 connector on the AVG7 Generator module to the CH 2 input connector
on the oscilloscope as shown in the following figure. (See Figure 15.)
96
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
3. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through termination to connect the
BLACK 1 connector on the test signal generator to the CH 3 input connector
on the oscilloscope as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15: Equipment connection for verifying the channel-to-channel delay
4. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
CH 1 and CH 2: 5 mV/div, CH 3: 1.00 V/div
Bandwidth
250 MHz (CH 1 and CH 2)
Vertical offset
0 mV (CH 1 and CH 2)
Horizontal scale
20 μs/div
Horizontal delay time
50 ns/div
Delayed runs time
6.468 μs (Delayed Only)
Trigger position
50%
Trigger source
CH 3
Trigger type
Edge
Acquire menu
Average 64
Repetitive Signal: OFF
CH 3 waveform
OFF
5. Use the CH 2 Vertical Position knob on the oscilloscope to align the CH 2
trace to the CH 1 trace with no signal input.
6. Press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL ENABLE buttons
simultaneously, and then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons to
restart the instrument in Factory mode. Continue holding down the FRONT
PANEL ENABLE button until the “TG700 start up with Factory Mode.”
message appears.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
97
Performance Verification
7. Set the test signal generator (ATG7 module) settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Output selection
BLACK 1
Signal format
NTSC
Test signal
Field Reference
8. Select the Field Square Wave signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
c. Press the FLAT FIELD button to select Field Square Wave.
9. Use the CH 1 Vertical Position and CH 2 Vertical Position knobs on the
oscilloscope to align the blanking level of the CH 1 signal to the blanking
level of the CH 2 signal at the center of the screen.
10. Change the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical offset
–143 mV (CH 1 and CH 2)
Horizontal delay time
2.00 ns/Div
Delay runs time
6.224 μs
11. Use the vertical cursors to perform the timing measurement and verify that the
time delay between the CH 1 waveform and the CH 2 waveform is within 1 ns.
12. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
13. Return the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical offset
0 mV (CH 1 and CH 2)
Delay runs time
6.468 μs (Delayed Only)
14. Repeat steps 9 through 11.
Frequency Response.
This test verifies the frequency response of the DAC test signal from the CH 1,
CH 2, and CH 3 outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
Peak detector
Peak detector head
Test signal generator
98
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
75 Ω feed-through termination
Three 75 Ω BNC cables
Perform the following procedure to verify the frequency response of the DAC test
signal from the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs:
1. Use the two 75 Ω BNC cables, peak detector head, and BNC female-to-female
connector to connect the upper CH 1 connector on the AVG7 Generator
module to the +INPUT connector on the peak detector amplifier as shown in
the following figure. (See Figure 16.)
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the OUTPUT connector on the peak
detector amplifier to the CH 1 input connector on the oscilloscope as shown in
the following figure. (See Figure 16.)
3. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through termination to connect the
BLACK 1 connector on the test signal generator to the CH 2 input connector
on the oscilloscope as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16: Equipment connection for verifying the frequency response
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
99
Performance Verification
4. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical scale
CH 1: 2 mV/div, CH 2: 1.00 V/div
Bandwidth
20 MHz (CH 1)
Horizontal scale
2 ms/div
Trigger position
10%
Trigger source
CH 2
Trigger type
Edge
Acquire menu
Peak Detect
5. Press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL ENABLE buttons
simultaneously, and then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons to
restart the instrument in Factory mode. Continue holding down the FRONT
PANEL ENABLE button until the “TG700 start up with Factory Mode.”
message appears.
6. Set the test signal generator (ATG7 module) settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Output selection
BLACK 1
Signal format
NTSC
Test signal
Field Reference
7. Select the 525 GBR signal format as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select 525 GBR, and then press ENTER.
c. Press the COLOR BAR button.
8. Select the DAC Test calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Test, and
then press ENTER.
c. Press ENTER again to confirm the signal output.
9. Select the Sync ON All Channels mode as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO, and then
press ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GBR SYNC.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Sync ON All
Channels, and then press ENTER.
100
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
10. Turn the LEVEL knob on the peak detector amplifier so that the green LED
light.
11. Verify that the differences between the maximum amplitude and minimum
amplitude from 500 kHz to 5 MHz are less than or equal to 3.5 mV. (See
Figure 17.)
Figure 17: Verifying the signal amplitudes from 500 kHz to 5 MHz
12. Move the peak detector head from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper
CH 2 connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 10 and 11.
13. Move the peak detector head from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper
CH 3 connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 10 and 11.
14. Move the peak detector head from the upper CH 3 connector to the lower
CH 1 connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 10 and 11.
15. Move the peak detector head from the lower CH 1 connector to the lower
CH 2 connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 10 and 11.
16. Move the peak detector head from the lower CH 2 connector to the lower
CH 3 connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 10 and 11.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
101
Performance Verification
Line Time Distortion.
This test verifies the line time distortion of the FCC composite signal from the CH
1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through termination
75 Ω coaxial termination
Perform the following procedure to verify the line time distortion of the field
square wave signal from the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs:
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper CH 1 connector on the AVG7
Generator module to the CHAN A connector on the video measurement set as
shown in the following figure.
2. Use the 75 Ω coaxial termination to terminate the other loopthrough to the
CHAN A connector on the video measurement set.
Figure 18: Equipment connection for verifying the line time distortion
3. Select the FCC Composite signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
c. Press the OTHER button to select FCC Composite.
4. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
5. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as NTSC.
102
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
6. In the Measure mode display, touch the Bar LineTime to open the Bar &
LineTime measurement display.
7. Press the Menu button to display the Bar & LineTime main menu.
8. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value to
256.
9. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 17 (Field=1 Line=17).
10. Verify that the line time distortion is less than or equal to 0.5%.
11. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat step 10.
12. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat step 10.
Field Time Distortion.
This test verifies the field time distortion of the field square wave signal from the
CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 connectors. The following equipment is required for
the test:
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through termination
75 Ω coaxial termination
Perform the following procedure to verify the field time distortion of the field
square wave signal from the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs:
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
2. Select the Field Square Wave signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
c. Press the FLAT FIELD button to select Field Square Wave.
3. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
4. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as NTSC.
5. In the Measure mode display, touch the Two Field to open the Two Field
measurement display.
6. Press the Menu button to display the Two Field main menu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
103
Performance Verification
7. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value to
256.
8. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 17 (Field=1 Line=17).
9. Verify that the field time distortion is less than or equal to 0.5%.
10. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat step 9.
11. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat step 9.
K Factor.
This test verifies the K factor of the CCIR17 signal from the CH 1, CH 2, and
CH 3 outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through termination
75 Ω coaxial termination
Perform the following procedure to verify the K factor of the CCIR17 signal
from the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs:
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
2. Select the CCIR17 signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select Pal 1, and then press ENTER.
c. Press the OTHER button to select CCIR17.
3. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
4. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as PAL.
5. In the Measure mode display, touch the K_Factor to open the K Factor
measurement display.
6. Press the Menu button to display the K Factor main menu.
7. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value to
256.
8. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 17 (Field=1 Line=17).
104
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
9. Verify that the K-2T value and K-PB value are within the range of –0.5% to
+0.5%.
10. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat step 9.
11. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat step 9.
Differential Phase and Gain.
This test verifies the differential phase and gain of the modulated 5 step signal
from the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs. The following equipment is required for
the test:
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through termination
75 Ω coaxial termination
Perform the following procedure to verify the differential phase and gain of the
modulated 5 step signal from the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs:
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
2. Select the Modulated 5 Step signal as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button to select NTSC, and then press ENTER.
b. Press the LINEARITY button to select Modulated 5 Step.
3. Select the CH1/2/3: Composites video configuration of the AVG7 Generator
module as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CONFIGURATION,
and then press ENTER to access the CONFIGURATION submenu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CH1/2/3:
Composites, and then press ENTER.
4. Set the Y video signal to off as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO:Y.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select OFF, and then
press ENTER.
5. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
6. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as NTSC.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
105
Performance Verification
7. In the Measure mode display, touch the DGDP soft key to open the differential
gain and phase measurement display.
8. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
9. Touch the Acquire soft key to access the Acquire submenu, and then make
the following settings:
Control
Setting
Auto Scan
OFF
Manual Steps
5
Ref Packet
15.2 m Sec
1 st Step
19.3 m Sec
Last Step
51.3 m Sec
Measure Cycle
10
Block Mode
ON
Block Mode Start
F1 21
Block Lines
11
Block Step
24
10. Touch the Reference soft key to access the Reference submenu, and then
touch the Store (1) Reference.
11. Touch the Relative to Ref. soft key to access the Relative to Reference
submenu, and then touch the Use (1) Reference.
12. Verify that the current Differential Gain value (p-p/max) and Differential
Phase value (peak to peak) are less than or equal to 0.02%.
13. Set the Y video signal to on as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO:Y.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select ON, and then press
ENTER.
14. Verify that the p-p/max value of the differential gain is less than or equal
to 0.5%.
15. Verify that the peak to peak value of the differential phase is less than or
equal to 0.5 degree.
16. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 14 and 15.
17. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 14 and 15.
18. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
106
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
19. Select the Modulated 5 Step signal in PAL format as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button to select Pal 1 or Pal 2, and then press
ENTER.
b. Press the LINEARITY button to select Modulated 5 Step.
20. Set the Y video signal to off as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO:Y.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select OFF, and then
press ENTER.
21. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
22. Touch the Video Standard soft key to recognize the applied video signal
as PAL.
23. In the Measure mode display, touch the DGDP soft key to open the differential
gain and phase measurement display.
24. Press the Menu button, and then touch the Average soft key and rotate the
front-panel knob to set the value to 256.
25. Touch the Acquire soft key to access the Acquire submenu, and then make
the following settings:
Control
Setting
Auto Scan
OFF
Manual Steps
5
Ref Packet
14.5 m Sec
1 st Step
18.8 m Sec
Last Step
51.3 m Sec
Measure Cycle
10
Block Mode
ON
Block Mode Start
F1 23
Block Lines
12
Block Step
26
26. Repeat steps 10 through 17.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
107
Performance Verification
Color Bars Signal Check.
This test verifies that the 75% color bars signal is normally output from all of the
channels. The following equipment is required for the test:
Color picture monitor
Three 75 Ω BNC cables
Three 75 Ω coaxial termination
Perform the following procedure to verify that the 75% color bars signal is
normally output from all of the channels.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper CH 1 connector on the AVG7
Generator module to the Y/G IN connector on the color picture monitor as
shown in the following figure.
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper CH 2 connector on the AVG7
Generator module to the PB/B IN connector on the color picture monitor as
shown in the following figure.
3. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper CH 3 connector on the AVG7
Generator module to the PR/R IN connector on the color picture monitor as
shown in the following figure.
4. Use the 75 Ω coaxial termination to terminate the Y/G OUT, PB/B OUT, and
PR/R OUT connectors on the color picture monitor.
5. Set the display setting of the color picture monitor to the GBR mode.
6. Select the 75% Color Bars signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select 525 GBR, and then press ENTER.
c. Press the COLOR BAR button to select 75% Color Bars.
108
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Figure 19: Equipment connection for checking the color bars signal
7. Select the Sync ON All Channels mode as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO, and then
press ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GBR SYNC.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Sync ON All
Channels, and then press ENTER.
8. Verify that the color bars signal is displayed normally.
9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the lower CH 1
connector, from the upper CH2 connector to the lower CH 2 connector, and
from the upper CH 3 connector to the lower CH 3 connector on the AVG7
Generator module and repeat step 8.
This completes the AVG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
109
Performance Verification
AWVG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the AWVG7 Analog
Wideband Video Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 101: Required equipment for AWVG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 1 GHz or higher
Tektronix TDS784D
Digital multimeter
1
5 1/2 digits
FLUKE 8842A
Peak detector amplifier
1
Tektronix part number 015-0408-00 and
TM500 series power supply
Peak detector head
1
Tektronix part number 015-0413-00
Color picture monitor
1
SONY BVMD14H5J and BKM129X
Test signal generator
1
Tektronix ATG7
75 Ω BNC cable
2
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω BNC cable
1
5C-2V, 1 m
Canare DH5C01-S-SA
75 Ω feed-through
termination
1
Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial termination
3
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
75 Ω signal adapter
1
BNC T connector
1
Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female-to-dual
banana adapter
1
Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
BNC female-to-female
connector
1
Canare BCJ-J
Test Record
Bandwidth: 1 GHz
Amplitude precision: –3 dB
Tektronix AMT75
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 102: AWVG7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
Tested Format: 1080 59.94i GBR
1.
110
Absolute Amplitude
CH 1 Output
CH 2 Output
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
CH 3 Output
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Table 102: AWVG7 test record (cont.)
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
2.
Channel Gain
Matching (Relative
to CH 1)
CH 2 Output
–0.5%
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output
–0.5%
%
0.5%
DC Offset
CH 1 Output (GBR)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 2 Output (GBR)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 3 Output (GBR)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 2 Output (YPbPr)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 3 Output (YPbPr)
–10 mV
mV
10 mV
CH 1 Output (Peak value
to 20 MHz)
–7.0 mV
mV
7.0 mV
CH 1 Output (Peak value
to 28 MHz)
–14.0 mV
mV
14.0 mV
CH 1 Output (Peak value
to 30 MHz)
–21.0 mV
mV
21.0 mV
CH 2 Output (Peak value
to 20 MHz)
–7.0 mV
mV
7.0 mV
CH 2 Output (Peak value
to 28 MHz)
–14.0 mV
mV
14.0 mV
CH 2 Output (Peak value
to 30 MHz)
–21.0 mV
mV
21.0 mV
CH 3 Output (Peak value
to 20 MHz)
–7.0 mV
mV
7.0 mV
CH 3 Output (Peak value
to 28 MHz)
–14.0 mV
mV
14.0 mV
CH 3 Output (Peak value
to 30 MHz)
–21.0 mV
mV
21.0 mV
CH 1 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
—–
%
0.5%
CH 2 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
—–
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
—–
%
0.5%
CH 1 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
—–
%
0.5%
CH 2 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
—–
%
0.5%
CH 3 Output ≤ 0.5%
(Peak to Peak value)
—–
%
0.5%
3.
4.
5.
6.
Frequency
Response
(Measured on DAC
Test Signal)
Line Time Distortion
(Measured on
100% Flat Field
signal)
Field Time
Distortion
(Measured on
100% Flat Field
signal)
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
111
Performance Verification
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video
Generator module is operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
DC Offset and Amplitude Error.
This test verifies the DC offset and amplitude error of the channel outputs. The
following equipment is required for the test:
Digital multimeter
BNC female-to-dual banana adapter
BNC T connector
75 Ω coaxial termination
75 Ω BNC cable
Perform the following procedure to verify the DC offset and amplitude error
of the channel outputs:
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, BNC T connector, 75 Ω coaxial termination, and
BNC female-to-dual banana adapter to connect the upper CH 1 connector
on the AWVG7 Generator module to the INPUT connector on the digital
multimeter as shown in the following figure.
Figure 20: Equipment connection for verifying the DC offset and amplitude error
2. Press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL ENABLE buttons
simultaneously, and then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons to
restart the instrument in Factory mode. Continue holding down the FRONT
PANEL ENABLE button until the “TG700 start up with Factory Mode.”
message appears.
112
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
3. Select the DAC Gain (GBR): 0 mV calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (GBR),
and then press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then
press ENTER.
4. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV. Note this
value as CH1_DC0.
5. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
6. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV. Note this
value as CH2_DC0.
7. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
8. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV. Note this
value as CH3_DC0.
9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
10. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 700.397mV, and then
press ENTER.
11. Read the value on the digital multimeter, and then note this value as
CH1_DC1.
12. Verify that CH1_DC1−CH1_DC0 is within the range of 693.0 mV to 707.0
mV. Note this value as CH1_V1.
13. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
14. Read the value on the digital multimeter, and then note this value as
CH2_DC1.
15. Verify that CH2_DC1−CH2_DC0 is within the range of 693.0 mV to 707.0
mV. Note this value as CH2_V1.
16. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
17. Read the value on the digital multimeter, and then note this value as
CH3_DC1.
18. CH3_DC1CH3_DC0 CH3_V1 CH3_DC0 CH3_V1
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
113
Performance Verification
19. Verify that the amplitude errors of the CH 2 and CH 3 outputs meet the
following relationships:
CH 2 amplitude error = ((CH2_V1/CH1_V1)−1)×100≤ ±0.5%
CH 3 amplitude error = ((CH3_V1/CH1_V1)-1)×100≤ ±0.5%
20. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
21. Select the DAC Gain (YPbPr) : 0 mV calibration signal for CH 2 and
CH 3 as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to display the CALIBRATION menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (YPbPr),
and then press ENTER.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then
press ENTER.
22. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV.
23. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
24. Verify that the output offset is within the range of –10 mV to 10 mV.
Frequency Response.
This test verifies the frequency response of the DAC test signal from the CH 1,
CH 2, and CH 3 outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
Peak detector amplifier
Peak detector head
Two 75 Ω BNC cables
Perform the following procedure to verify the frequency response of the DAC test
signal from the CH 1, CH 2 and CH 3 outputs:
1. Use the two 75 Ω BNC cables, the peak detector head, and BNC
female-to-female connector to connect the upper CH 1 connector on the
AWVG7 Generator module to the +INPUT connector on the peak detector
amplifier as shown in the following figure.
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the OUTPUT connector on the peak
detector amplifier to the CH 1 input connector on the oscilloscope as shown in
the following figure. (See Figure 21.)
114
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
3. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical scale
CH 1: 5 mV/div
Bandwidth
250 MHz
Horizontal scale
5 ms/div
Trigger position
10%
Trigger source
CH 1
Trigger type
Edge
Trigger level
–50 mV
Acquire menu
Average 64
Figure 21: Equipment connection for verifying the frequency response
4. Press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL ENABLE buttons
simultaneously, and then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons to
restart the instrument in Factory mode. Continue holding down the FRONT
PANEL ENABLE button until the “TG700 start up with Factory Mode.”
message appears.
5. Select the DAC Test calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
115
Performance Verification
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Test, and
then press ENTER.
d. Press ENTER again to confirm the signal output.
6. Turn the LEVEL knob on the peak detector amplifier so that the green LED
lights.
7. Verify that the differences between the maximum amplitude and the minimum
amplitude from 500 kHz to 20 MHz are less than or equal to 7 mV. (See
Figure 22.)
Figure 22: Verifying the signal amplitudes
8. Verify that the differences between the maximum amplitude and the minimum
amplitude from 500 kHz to 28 MHz are less than or equal to 14 mV. (See
Figure 22.)
9. Verify that the differences between the maximum amplitude and the minimum
amplitude from 500 kHz to 30 MHz are less than or equal to 21 mV. (See
Figure 22.)
10. Move the peak detector head from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper
CH 2 connector on the AWVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 11
through 9.
11. Move the peak detector head from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper
CH 3 connector on the AWVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 11
through 9.
116
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Field Time Distortion.
This test verifies the field time distortion of the 100% flat field signal from the
CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
Test signal generator
75 Ω signal adapters
75 Ω feed-through terminator
Two 75 Ω BNC cables
Perform the following procedure to verify the field time distortion of the 100%
flat field signal:
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω signal adapter to connect the upper CH
1 connector on the AWVG7 Generator module to the CH 1 input connector on
the oscilloscope as shown in the following figure.
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through termination to connect the
BLACK 1 connector on the test signal generator to the CH 2 input connector
on the oscilloscope as shown in the following figure.
Figure 23: Equipment connection for verifying the field time distortion
3. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical scale
CH 1: 5 mV/div, CH 2: 1.00 V/div
Vertical offset
700 mV
Horizontal scale
5 ms/div
Horizontal delay time
5.0 μs/div
Delayed runs time
343.0 μs (Delayed Only)
Trigger position
50%
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
117
Performance Verification
Control
Setting
Trigger source
CH 2
Trigger type
Edge
Acquire menu
Average 64
CH 2 waveform
OFF
Courser
V Bars
Measure
CH 1 Mean
4. Set the test signal generator (ATG7 module) settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Output selection
BLACK 1
Signal format
NTSC
Test signal
Field Reference
5. Select the 100% Flat Field signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select 1080 59i GBR, and then press
ENTER.
c. Press the FLAT FIELD button to select 100% Flat Field.
6. Place one of the vertical cursor on the portion after 4 μs of the rising edge of
the line bar signal, and place the other vertical cursor on the portion before
4 ms of the falling edge of the line bar signal.
7. On the oscilloscope, select Gate:ON (Gate with V Bar Coursers) from
Measure menu.
8. Read the C1 Mean value, and then note this value as V1.
9. Change the Delayed Runs Time value to 8.262 ms, and repeat step 6.
10. Read the C1 Mean value, and then note this value as V2.
11. Verify that the V1 and V2 values meet the following relationships:
(V1-V2) / V2 v 0.5%
12. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 6 through 11.
13. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module and repeat steps 6 through 11.
118
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Line Time Distortion.
This test verifies the line time distortion of the 100% Flat Field signal from the
CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
Test signal generator
75 Ω signal adapters
75 Ω feed-through termination
Two 75 Ω BNC cables
Perform the following procedure to verify the line time distortion of the 100%
Flat Field signal.
Use the equipment connection from the previous test.
1. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module.
2. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical scale
CH 1: 5 mV/div, CH 2: 1.00 V/div
Vertical offset
700 mV
Horizontal scale
20 μs/div
Horizontal delay time
2.0 μs/div
Delayed runs time
165.0 μs (Delayed Only)
Trigger position
50%
Record length
1000
Trigger source
CH 2
Trigger type
Edge
Acquire menu
Average 64
CH 2 waveform
OFF
Courser
V Bars
Measure
CH 1 MAX, CH 1 MIN
3. Set the test signal generator (ATG7 module) settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Output selection
BLACK 1
Signal format
NTSC
Test signal
Field Reference
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
119
Performance Verification
4. Select the 100% Flat Field signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select 1080 59i GBR, and then press
ENTER.
c. Press the FLAT FIELD button to select 100% Flat Field.
5. Place one of the vertical cursors on the portion after 1 μs of the rising edge of
the line bar signal, and place the other vertical cursor on the portion before
1 ms of the falling edge of the line bar signal.
6. On the oscilloscope, select Gate:ON (Gate with V Bar Cursers) from the
Measure menu.
7. Read the C1 MAX value and C1 MIN value, and then verify that the
differences between these values are within 3 mV.
8. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module and repeat step 7.
9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 Generator module and repeat step 7.
Color Bars Signal Check. This test verifies that the 75% color bars signal is
normally output from all of the channels. The following equipment is required for
the test:
Color picture monitor
Three 75 Ω BNC cables
Three 75 Ω coaxial termination
Perform the following procedure to verify that the 75% color bars signal is
normally output from all of the channels:
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper CH 1 connector on the AWVG7
Generator module to the Y/G IN connector on the color picture monitor as
shown in the following figure.
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper CH 2 connector on the AWVG7
Generator module to the PB/B IN connector on the color picture monitor as
shown in the following figure.
3. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper CH 3 connector on the AWVG7
Generator module to the PR/R IN connector on the color picture monitor as
shown in the following figure.
4. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminations to terminate the Y/G OUT, PB/B OUT, and
PR/R OUT connectors on the color picture monitor.
5. Set the display setting of the color picture monitor to the GBR mode.
120
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
6. Select the 75% Color Bars signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select 1080 59i GBR, and then press
ENTER.
c. Press the COLOR BAR button to select 75% Color Bars.
Figure 24: Equipment connection for checking the color bars signal
7. Select the Sync ON All Channels mode as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO, and then
press ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Sync ON All
Channels, and then press ENTER.
8. Verify that the color bars signal is displayed normally.
9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the lower CH 1
connector, from the upper CH 2 connector to the lower CH 2 connector,
and from upper CH 3 connector to lower CH 3 connector on the AWVG7
Generator module and repeat step 8.
This completes the AWVG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
121
Performance Verification
BG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the BG7 Black Generator
module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 103: Required equipment for BG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 200 MHz or higher
Tektronix TDS540D
Video measurement set
1
75 Ω BNC cable
1
75 Ω feed-through
terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
Test Record
Tektronix VM700T Option 01/11
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 104: BG7 test record
Serial Number
Step
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
BLACK 1
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 2
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 3
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
Function Tested
Black Output (NTSC)
1.
2.
3.
122
Blanking Level
Burst Amplitude
Sync Amplitude
BLACK 4
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 1 (Peak to
Peak Value)
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 2 (Peak to
Peak Value)
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 3 (Peak to
Peak Value)
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 4 (Peak to
Peak Value)
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 1
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 2
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 3
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
BLACK 4
280.0 mV
mV
291.4 mV
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Table 104: BG7 test record (cont.)
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
BLACK 1
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 2
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 3
–50 mV
mV
+50 mV
Tri-Level Sync Output
4.
5.
6.
Blanking Level
BLACK 4
–50 m
mV
+50 mV
BLACK 1
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 2
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 3
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 4
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 1
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 2
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 3
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
BLACK 4
294.0 mV
mV
306.0 mV
Luminance Gain
(Measured on PAL
75% Color Bars
Over Red signal)
BLACK 3
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
BLACK 4
693.0 mV
mV
707.0 mV
Chrominance Gain
(Measured on PAL
75% Color Bars
Over Red signal)
BLACK 3
650.6 mV
mV
677.0 mV
BLACK 4
650.6 mV
mV
677.0 mV
Sync Amplitude
plus
Sync Amplitude
minus
Option CB
7.
8.
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the BG7 Black Generator module is
operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Trilevel Sync Outputs. This test verifies the blanking level and sync amplitude of
trilevel sync signals. The following equipment is required for the test:
Oscilloscope
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω feed-through terminator
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
123
Performance Verification
Perform the following procedure to verify that the blanking level and sync
amplitude of trilevel sync signals.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through terminator to connect
the BLACK 1 connector on the BG7 Generator module to the oscilloscope
CH1 input as shown in the following figure.
Figure 25: Equipment connection for verifying the trilevel sync outputs
2. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the TG700 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press ENTER to recall the factory default settings.
3. Select the 1080 59.94i HD sync signal for BLACK 1 to BLACK 4 as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the BG7 main menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and
then press ENTER.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select HD SYNC, and
then press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 59.94i, and
then press ENTER.
e. Press the CANCEL button twice to return the module main menu.
f.
124
Repeat parts b through dof this step to select the 1080 59.94i HD sync
signal for BLACK 2 to BLACK 4.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
4. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
50 mV/div
Vertical offset
0V
Horizontal
500 ns/div
Horizontal position
Center
Trig position
50%
Trig slope
Rising Edge
Acquire menu
Average 32
5. Verify that the blanking level is within the range of +50 mV to –50 mV.
6. Change the oscilloscope vertical scale to 10 mV/div.
7. Align the blanking level with the center graticule line on the oscilloscope.
8. Change the oscilloscope vertical offset to 300 mV.
9. Verify that the high level of the signal (sync amplitude plus) is within the
range of +0.6 div to –0.6 div to the center graticule (except for ringing of
the rising edge).
10. Change the oscilloscope vertical offset to –300 mV.
11. Verify that the low level of the signal (sync amplitude minus) is within the
range of +0.6 div to –0.6 div to the center graticule (except for ringing of
the falling edge).
12. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat steps 4 through 10.
13. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK
3 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat steps 4 through 10.
14. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 3 connector to the BLACK
4 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat steps 4 through 10.
Black Burst Outputs. This test verifies the blanking level, burst amplitude, and
sync amplitude of black burst signals. The following equipment is required for
the test:
Oscilloscope
Video measurement set
75 Ω feed-through terminator
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify that the blanking level, burst amplitude,
and sync amplitude of black burst signals. Use the equipment connection and
controls from the previous test.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
125
Performance Verification
1. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 4 connector to the BLACK
1 connector on the BG7 Generator module.
2. Select the NTSC Black Burst signal for BLACK 1 to BLACK 4 as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the module main menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and
then press ENTER.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC, and then
press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst, and
then press ENTER.
e. Press the CANCEL button twice to return the module main menu.
f.
Repeat parts b to d of this step to select the NTSC black burst signal for
BLACK 2 to BLACK 4.
3. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Vertical
50 mV/div
Vertical offset
0V
Horizontal
1 μs/div
Horizontal position
Center
Trig position
10%
Acquire menu
Average 32
Measure menu
Mean
Trig type
Video
Trig standard
NTSC
Trig source
CH1
Trig polarity
Negative
Trig filed
Odd Field
Trig line
2
Trig mode
MONO (2 Field)
4. Verify that the blanking level is within the range of +50 mV to –50 mV.
5. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
6. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK
3 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
7. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 3 connector to the BLACK
4 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat step 4.
126
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
8. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 4 connector to the BLACK
1 connector on the BG7 Generator module.
9. Disconnect the BNC cable from the 75 Ω feed-through terminator on the
oscilloscope input, and then connect the BNC cable to the CHAN A connector
on the video measurement set as shown in the following figure.
10. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the other loop through to the
CHAN A connector on the video measurement set.
11. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
Figure 26: Equipment connection for verifying burst and sync amplitude
12. Touch the Mode soft key to set the instrument to Analog mode, and then
touch the H_Timing soft key.
13. Press the Menu button to display the H_Timing main menu.
14. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value
to 32.
15. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
16. Verify that the burst and sync amplitude are within the range of 39.2 IRE
to 40.8 IRE.
17. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat step 16.
18. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK
3 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat step 16.
19. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 3 connector to the BLACK
4 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat step 16.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
127
Performance Verification
Luminance and Chrominance Gain (Option CB Only). This test verifies the
luminance and chrominance gain of the color bars signal.
1. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 4 connector to the BLACK
3 connector on the BG7 Generator module.
2. Select the 75% Color Bars Over Red signal for BLACK 3 and BLACK
4 as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the BG7 main menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 3, and
then press ENTER.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select PAL, and then
press ENTER.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 75% Color Bars
Over Red, and then press ENTER.
e. Press the CANCEL button twice to return the module main menu.
f.
Repeat parts b through e of this step to select the 75% Color Bars Over
Red signal for BLACK 4.
3. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
4. Touch the Video Standard soft key to change the acceptable video standard
for PAL.
5. In the Measure mode display, touch the Color Bar soft key to open the Color
Bar measurement display.
6. Press the Menu button to display the Color Bar main menu.
7. Touch the Average soft key and rotate the front-panel knob to set the value to
256.
8. Press the Select Line button and rotate the front-panel knob to set the
measurement line to 100 (Field=1 Line=100).
9. Verify that the luminance gain (level) is within the range of 693.0 mV to
707.0 mV.
10. Verify that the chrominance gain (level) is within the range of 650.6 mV to
677.0 mV. Note that the chrominance gain is measured by Red.
11. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 3 connector to the BLACK
4 connector on the BG7 Generator module and repeat steps 8 and 9.
This completes the BG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
128
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
DVG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the DVG7 Digital Video
Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 105: Required equipment for DVG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Video measurement set
1
75 Ω BNC cable
1
75 Ω coaxial terminator
1
Test Record
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Tektronix VM700T Option 01/11/1S
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 106: DVG7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
1.
Serial Output
Amplitude
SIGNAL 1
720 mV
mV
880 mV
SIGNAL 2
720 mV
880 mV
Serial Output Rise
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
SIGNAL 1
0.40 ns
mV
ns
1.50 ns
SIGNAL 2
0.40 ns
ns
1.50 ns
Serial Output Fall
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
SIGNAL 1
0.40 ns
ns
1.50 ns
SIGNAL 2
0.40 ns
ns
1.50 ns
Serial Output
Amplitude
BLACK 1
720 mV
mV
880 mV
BLACK 2
720 mV
880 mV
Serial Output Rise
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
BLACK 1
0.40 ns
mV
ns
BLACK 2
0.40 ns
ns
1.50 ns
Serial Output Fall
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
BLACK 1
0.40 ns
ns
1.50 ns
BLACK 2
0.40 ns
ns
1.50 ns
2.
3.
Option BK
4.
5.
6.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
1.50 ns
129
Performance Verification
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the DVG7 Digital Video Generator module
is operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Serial Digital Outputs. This test verifies that serial digital signals are output
correctly from the SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors. The following
equipment is required for the test:
Video measurement set
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify that serial digital signals are output
correctly from the SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect SIGNAL 1 connector on the DVG7
Generator module to the SDI Ch.A connector on the video measurement set
rear panel as shown in the following figure.
2. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the other loop through to the SDI
Ch.A connector on the video measurement set rear panel.
Figure 27: Equipment connection for verifying the serial digital outputs
130
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
3. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the TG700 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press ENTER to recall the factory default settings.
4. Select the 75% Color Bars signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the DVG7 main menu.
b. Press the COLOR BAR test signal button until the 75% Color Bars
signal is selected.
c. Press the CANCEL button to return to the DVG7 main menu.
5. Turn on the circle overlay as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select OVERLAY, and
then press ENTER.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Circle, and then
press ENTER to access the CIRCLE OVERLAY submenu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable, and then
press ENTER.
6. Turn on the embedded audio for Group 1 as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select AUDIO
(EMBEDDED).
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1, and then
press ENTER to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable, and then
press ENTER.
e. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
7. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
8. Touch the SDI soft key to set the measurement set to Digital mode.
9. In the Measure mode display, touch the SDI Format Monitor application.
10. Verify that no error messages appear on the SDI Format Monitor display.
11. Press the Picture button to set the video measurement set to SDI Picture
application.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
131
Performance Verification
12. Verify that the correct color bar and overlay circle are displayed on the SDI
Picture display.
13. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
14. In the Measure mode display, touch the SDI Audio Format Analyzer
application.
15. Verify that no CRC error appears on the SDI Audio Format Analyzer display.
16. Move the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector to the SIGNAL 2
connector on the DVG7 Generator module.
17. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
18. Repeat steps 9 through 15.
Serial Digital Black Outputs (Option BK Only). This test verifies that serial digital
black signals are output correctly from the BLACK1 and BLACK 2 connectors.
19. Move the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 2 connector to the BLACK 1
connector on the DVG7 Generator module.
20. Select the 40% Flat Field signal as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to return to the module main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select BLACK (OPTION).
c. Press ENTER to access the BLACK submenu.
d. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SIGNAL.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 40% Flat Field
and press ENTER.
21. Turn on the embedded audio for Group 1 as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to return the BLACK submenu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select AUDIO
(EMBEDDED).
c. Press ENTER to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu for Group 1.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1, and then
press ENTER to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable, and then
press ENTER.
f.
Press the CANCEL button to return the BLACK submenu.
22. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
132
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
23. Repeat steps 9 through 15.
24. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector on the DVG7 Generator module.
25. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
26. Repeat steps 9 through 15.
Eye Pattern Check. This test verifies the signal level and rise/fall times of the
SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 outputs. The following equipment is required for
the test:
Video measurement set
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the signal level and rise/fall times of
the SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 outputs.
Use the equipment connection and controls from the previous test.
1. Press the Measure button on the video measurement set to open the Measure
mode display.
2. In the Measure mode display, touch the SDI Eye Diagram application to
open the Eye Diagram display.
3. In the Eye Diagram display, touch the Average soft key to set the value for
Eye Persistence to Infinity.
4. In the Eye Diagram display, touch the Measure soft key to open the Measure
submenu.
5. In the Measure submenu, touch the following soft keys to toggle each
measurement display on: Eye Amplitude, Rise\Fall Times, and Rise\Fall
Adjusted.
6. Verify that the eye amplitude and rise and fall times values are as follows:
Eye amplitude: 720 mV to 880 mV
Rise and fall time: 400 ps to 1500 ps
7. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL 1 connector to the
SIGNAL 2 connector and change the 75 Ω terminator from the SIGNAL 2
connector to the SIGNAL 1 connector on the DVG7 Generator module.
8. Repeat step 6.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
133
Performance Verification
BLACK Output Eye Pattern Check (Option BK Only). This test verifies the signal
level and rise/fall times of the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs.
9. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL 2 connector to the
BLACK 1 connector on the DVG7 Generator module.
10. Repeat step 6.
11. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 1 connector to the
BLACK 2 connector on the DVG7 Generator module.
12. Repeat step 6.
This completes the DVG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
134
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
GPS7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the GPS7 GPS
Synchronization and Timecode module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 107: Required equipment for GPS7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirements
Recommended equipment
GPS antenna feed with
good signal level
1
Less than 5 dB attenuation since
last amplifier
Trimble Bullet III, 5v, 35 dB gain,
antenna with F-connector, or equivalent
Cable (use only if you do not have a
GPS feed): up to 200 ft Belden 1694A,
or equivalent, with F connector on one
end and a BNC on the other
SDI video signal source
1
6, 10, and 20 dB antenna
pads
variable
If antenna has no
additional amps, one
6 dB and one 10 dB
should be adequate.
For a fully buffered
system, 30 or 40
dB total is probably
needed.
Waveform monitor
1
Tektronix WFM8300 or WFM7120 with
Option CPS
Second reference system
1
Tektronix TG700 with a GPS7 module
Oscilloscope
1
Tektronix TDS3054B or equivalent
with 100 MHz or greater bandwidth to
measure 10 MHz sine amplitude and
video rise and fall times
Voltmeter
1
Fluke
LTC/GPIO breakout
adapter cable
1
Tektronix part number 012-1717-00
600 Ω LTC load with
meter access
1
Create this item by soldering a 600 Ω
resistor to pins 2 and 3 of a female XLR
DVG7 or HDVG7 module in either a
reference instrument or the mainframe
under test, or can be an external signal
Use several pads that allow similar
ranges
6 dB, Mini-circuits HAT-6-75
10 dB, Mini-circuits HAT-10-75
20 dB, Mini-circuits HAT-20-75
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
135
Performance Verification
Table 107: Required equipment for GPS7 performance verification (cont.)
Item
No.
Minimum requirements
Recommended equipment
Antenna splitter
1
Use to drive one signal into two
GPS7 inputs
Any 2:1 splitter with appropriate
connector adapters
or
GPS Source S12S with (3) SMA to BNC
adapters, Tyco part number 1058083-1
or
ZFDC-10-5-S with 3 SMA to BNC
adapters, Tyco part number 1058083-1
75 Ω, precision
terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
75 Ω feed-through
terminator
1
Tektronix part number 011-0055-02
75 Ω coaxial terminator
2
Tektronix part number 011-0163-00
BNC T
2
Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC to Banana Plug
adapter
1
Pomona model 1269
75 Ω BNC cable
4
3 ft long
BNC-to-test clip adapter
1
Use to help measure voltage
across 600 Ω load resistor for LTC
level procedure
136
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 108: GPS7 test record
Serial
number
Cal date
Step
Function tested
Temperature
Value
Value
errors
Pass
Fail
TG700 diagnostics
Pass
Fail
GPS7 diagnostics
Pass
Fail
Flashing green (open
circuit)
Pass
Fail
Steady green
(nominal load)
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
NTSC Functional Genlock and
timing
Pass
Fail
PAL Functional Genlock and timing
Pass
Fail
1080p25 Functional lock and
timing
Pass
Fail
Genlock ADC Bus Stuck
Pass
Fail
Genlock ADC Bus Short
Pass
Fail
- Min
+Max
Measured
value
Preparation
DC antenna output power voltage
0V
3.3 V
3.3 V
4V
5V
5V
6V
Antenna current and fault
thresholds
Voltage with nominal
load
4.5 V
5V
Steady red (short
circuit)
Lock to GPS signal from antenna
Signal quality
(reference unit)
40
80
Difference in signal
quality between
reference unit and
unit under test
≤ 20
units from
reference
unit value
≥ 20
units from
reference
unit value
Genlock Input
Minimum level
1650
2650
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
137
Performance Verification
Table 108: GPS7 test record (cont.)
Serial
number
Cal date
Step
Function tested
Temperature
- Min
+Max
Maximum level
2650
3650
Gain
900
1100
Minimum level
1250
1500
Maximum level
2200
2450
Gain
850
1050
Minimum level
1250
1500
Maximum level
2200
2450
Gain
850
1050
LTC Positive Input Terminated
Loop Back Gain
400
525
LTC Negative Input Terminated
Loop Back Gain
400
525
Measured
value
Value
Value
LTC Positive Input Open Circuit
Loop Back
LTC Negative Input Open Circuit
Loop Back
Black output functional test and
frame pulse test
Black 1
Black 2
Black 3
NTSC
Pass
Fail
1080 60i
Pass
Fail
1080 50i
Pass
Fail
PAL
Pass
Fail
PAL
Pass
Fail
1080 24p
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Black output bit integrity
Black 1
Ramp
Calibration setting
(AMPL. DAC number)
Black 2
Ramp
Calibration setting
(AMPL. DAC number)
Black 3
Ramp
Calibration setting
(AMPL. DAC number)
Black amplitude and offset
138
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Table 108: GPS7 test record (cont.)
Serial
number
Cal date
Step
Function tested
Black 1
Temperature
- Min
+Max
– 40 mV
+ 40 mV
Amplitude
(difference)
693 mV
707 mV
0 mV (offset)
– 40 mV
+ 40 mV
Amplitude
(difference)
693 mV
707 mV
0 mV (offset)
– 40 mV
+ 40 mV
693 mV
707 mV
0 mV (offset)
Measured
value
Value
Value
700 mV
Black 2
700 mV
Black 3
700 mV
Amplitude
(difference)
Black output rise and fall time
Black 1,
NTSC
fall time of falling sync
edge
120 ns
150 ns
Black
1, 1080
60i
rising edge in the
middle of the tri-level
sync
40 ns
60 ns
Black 2,
NTSC
fall time of falling sync
edge
120 ns
150 ns
Black
2, 1080
60i
rising edge in the
middle of the tri-level
sync
40 ns
60 ns
Black 2,
NTSC
fall time of falling sync
edge
120 ns
150 ns
Black
2, 1080
60i
rising edge in the
middle of the tri-level
sync
40 ns
60 ns
1.35 V
1.65 V
4.5 V
5.5 V
Sine amplitude
sine amplitude
LTC level
LTC 1
Maximum positive
voltage
Maximum negative
voltage
p–p voltage
(difference)
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
139
Performance Verification
Table 108: GPS7 test record (cont.)
Serial
number
Cal date
Step
Function tested
LTC 2
Temperature
- Min
+Max
4.5 V
5.5 V
4.5 V
5.5 V
4.5 V
5.5 V
Measured
value
Value
Value
Pass
Fail
Maximum positive
voltage
Maximum negative
voltage
p-p voltage
(difference)
LTC 3
Maximum positive
voltage
Maximum negative
voltage
p-p voltage
(difference)
LTC 4
Maximum positive
voltage
Maximum negative
voltage
p-p voltage
(difference)
GPI output functional test
GPI 1
4.5 V
GPI 2
5.5 V
< 0.5 V
GPI 1 (antenna
disconnected)
4.5 V
5.5 V
< 0.5 V
GPI 2 (antenna
disconnected)
GPI input functional test
Program time
Frequency accuracy when locked
to GPS
Vector phase change
– 38 °
+ 38 °
Frame timing accuracy
– 0.185 μs
+ 0.185 μs
Internal frequency
Timing
6,000
20,000
Gain calibration
100
200
140
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Procedures
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification Preparation.)
Performance verification procedures can be performed individually, if needed.
Check the GPS7 module Diagnostics before starting these procedures by
performing the following steps:
1. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module.
2. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to scroll through the diagnostics
readings and check for any warnings or errors.
5. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
Start Up In Factory Mode
Although not all of the following tests need to be performed in Factory Mode,
they can be. If you are going to perform all of the procedures, or a particular
set of procedures, start up the instrument in factory mode at the start of the first
procedure.
Leave the instrument in factory mode until you are finished or the instructions
say otherwise.
To start up in factory mode, perform the following procedure:
1. Cycle the mainframe power by unplugging the power cord from the rear of
the instrument and then holding the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button while
plugging the power back into the instrument. Continue to hold the button
during start up until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows on the display.
2. Restore the factory preset:
a. Press the ENTER button to select PRESET RECALL.
b. Press the left (◄) arrow button until Factory Default appears.
c. Press the ENTER button to load the preset.
3. When loading is complete, press the CANCEL button to exit the Factory
Default menu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
141
Performance Verification
DC Antenna Output Power Voltage. Perform the following procedure to check that
the DC antenna power output is in the proper voltage range.
1. Connect the BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter to the voltmeter.
2. Connect the BNC T to the adapter.
3. Connect a 75 Ω BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector.
4. Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the
module.
5. Measure the voltage and record the value in the test record.
6. Set the antenna voltage to 3.3 V:
a. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GPS SETUP.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Antenna Power.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 3.3 V.
f.
Press the ENTER button.
7. Check that the voltmeter shows between 3.3 V and 4 V.
8. Record the result in the test record.
9. Now set the antenna voltage to 5 V:
a. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 5 V.
b. Press the ENTER button.
10. Check that the voltmeter shows between 5 V and 6 V.
11. Press the CANCEL button to exit the Antenna Power menu.
12. Record the result in the test record.
142
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Antenna Current and Fault Thresholds. Perform the following procedure to check
that the antenna current and fault thresholds are within limits.
1. Connect the BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter to the voltmeter.
2. Connect the BNC T to the adapter.
3. Set the antenna voltage to 5 V if it is not already:
a. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GPS SETUP.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Antenna Power.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 5 V.
f.
Press the ENTER button.
4. Connect a 75 Ω BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector.
5. Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the
module.
6. Check that the LED located between the DSUB connector and the antenna
input on the rear panel of the module is flashing green. This indicates an
open circuit.
7. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
8. Apply a 75 Ω precision terminator to the BNC T connector and check that
the voltage is between 4.5 V and 5 V.
9. Record the result in the test record.
10. Check that the LED on the module rear panel is a steady green. This indicates
a nominal load.
11. Record the Pass or Fail in the test record.
12. Remove the BNC-to-Banana adapter from the BNC T, and install a second
BNC T and a precision terminator on the end of the cable to the antenna input.
This will exceed the allowed current on the antenna.
13. Check that the LED on the module rear panel is a steady red. This indicates a
short circuit.
14. Record the result in the test record.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
143
Performance Verification
Lock to GPS Signal From Antenna. Perform the following procedure to check that
the GPS locks onto the minimum allowable signal. This test requires a reference
GPS7 unit.
1. Set the antenna power as needed by the antenna in the test system.
2. Connect an antenna splitter to the GPS input signal feed.
3. Connect one output of the splitter to the GPS antenna input of the reference
unit and then power on the unit.
4. Connect the other output of the splitter to the GPS antenna input of the
module under test.
5. Check the signal quality on both the module under test and the reference unit:
a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select STATUS from the
GPS7 module menu.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Signal Quality.
c. If the signal quality does not already show “Locked”, check that the signal
quality changes from No Signal to Low Signal to Acquiring satellites to
Adjusting phase to Locked.
NOTE. It is okay if some steps are skipped. Depending on the signal level, it
may take from a few seconds to several minutes to leave the “No Signal” state.
6. Add attenuating pads between the antenna and the splitter until the signal
quality on the reference unit is in the 40 to 80 range.
7. Record the signal quality of the reference unit in the test record.
8. Check that the signal quality on the module under test is within 20 counts
of the reference unit.
9. Record the difference between the reference unit and the unit under test in
the test record.
10. Remove the attenuators from the input to the splitter and reconnect the signal
from the antenna. If possible, leave the antenna connected during subsequent
tests to allow the system to stabilize.
144
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Genlock Function. Perform the following procedure to check that the genlock
function is operating correctly.
NOTE. This performance verification procedure can only be performed on GPS7
modules with the REF IN connector on the rear panel. If your module does not
have that input, you do not need to do this procedure.
This test requires a reference GPS7 or BG7 module. If you are using a GPS7 for
the reference module, it does not need the Genlock feature. This test should be
performed in factory mode. (See page 141, Start Up In Factory Mode.)
1. Use a 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the BLACK 1 connector on the reference
GPS7 module in the TG700 to the BLACK 1 / REF connector on the GPS7
module under test.
2. Use a 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the BLACK 2 connector on the reference
GPS7 module in the TG700 to one of the Ref Loop inputs on the waveform
monitor. Terminate the other reference input on the waveform monitor.
3. Use a 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the BLACK 2 connector on the GPS7
under test to the CMPST A connector of the waveform monitor. Terminate
the other loop A input on the waveform monitor.
4. Press the composite input and the EXT REF buttons on the front panel of the
waveform monitor to display the composite input relative to the reference
signal.
5. Set the waveform monitor to 4-tile display mode and select the following
displays: WFM, Vector, Timing (press the MEAS button), and Video Session
(press the STATUS button).
6. Recall the Factory Preset for both the reference GPS7 and the GPS7 under
test as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button on the TG700 mainframe until you see
TG700: PRESET in the menu.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Press the left (◄) arrow button until you see Factory Default in the menu.
d. Press the ENTER button.
e. When the factory default has finished loading, press the CANCEL button.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
145
Performance Verification
7. Set the GPS7 reference module source to Internal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button until you see GPS7 in the menu.
b. Press the down (▼) arrow button until REFERENCE appears in the
menu, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the left (◄) arrow button until Internal appears in the menu as the
source, and then press the ENTER button.
d. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
8.
Do the following steps to check that both the Black 1 and Black 2 outputs
of the reference GPS7 are set to NTSC Black Burst. (This should have been
done automatically when the instrument was reset to factory default.)
a. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT OUTPUT appears in
the menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow until BLACK 1 appears in the menu,
and press the ENTER button.
c. You should see SELECT FORMAT in the menu. If you do not, press the
down (▼) arrow button until it appears.
d. You should see NTSC on the menu.
If you do, the output is set correctly and you should proceed to step 9 after
you have repeated this procedure for the Black 2 output.
If you do not, press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button until NTSC
appears, press the ENTER button. and then proceed to step e.
e. You should see Black Burst on the menu. If you do not, press the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button until Black Burst appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
f.
Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the menu.
g. Repeat step 8 for the Black 2 input.
9. Set the reference mode of the GPS7 under test to NTSC Burst as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button until you see GPS7 in the menu.
b. Press the down (▼) arrow button until REFERENCE appears in the
menu, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the right (►) arrow button until you see NTSC Burst in the menu,
and then press the ENTER button.
d. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
146
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
10. Do the following steps to check that the Black 2 output of the GPS7 under
test is set to NTSC Black Burst. (This should have been done automatically
when the instrument was reset to factory default.).
a. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT OUTPUT appears in
the menu.
b. Press the right (►) arrow until BLACK 2 appears, and press the ENTER
button.
c. You should see SELECT FORMAT in the menu. If you do not, press the
down (▼) arrow button until it appears.
d. You should see NTSC on the menu.
If you do, the output is set correctly and you should proceed to step 11.
If you do not, press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button until NTSC
appears, press the ENTER button. and then proceed to step e.
e. You should see Black Burst on the menu. If you do, press the ENTER
button. If you do not, press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button until
Black Burst appears, and then press the ENTER button.
f.
Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the menu.
11. Check the following and record Pass under NTSC Functional Genlock and
Timing in the test record if all conditions are met. If any of these conditions
are not met, record Fail.
Check that the Ext Ref light on the front panel of the TG700 of the module
under test is a steady green.
Check that the Timing display on the waveform monitor reads 0 lines of
offset and less than .1 μs of horizontal offset.
Check that the waveform in the Vector display on the waveform monitor
is stable and not spinning
12. Set the Black 1 and Black 2 outputs of the reference GPS7 to PAL. Do the
following steps for each output:
a. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT OUTPUT appears in
the menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow until BLACK 1 appears in the menu,
and press the ENTER button.
c. You should see SELECT FORMAT in the menu. If you do not, press the
down (▼) arrow button until it appears.
d. Press the right (►) arrow button until PAL appears on the menu, and then
press the ENTER button.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
147
Performance Verification
e. Press the right (►) arrow button until Black Burst appears on the menu,
and then press the ENTER button.
f.
Repeat this entire procedure for the Black 2 input.
g. Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the menu.
13. Set the reference mode on the GPS7 under test to PAL Burst as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) arrow button until REFERENCE appears in the menu,
and then press the ENTER button.
b. Press the right (►) arrow button until you see PAL Burst in the menu,
and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
14. Set the Black 2 output of the GPS7 under test to PAL Burst as follows:
a. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT OUTPUT appears in
the menu.
b. Press the right (►) arrow button until BLACK 2 appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
c. Press the right (►) arrow button until PAL appears in the menu, and then
press the ENTER button.
d. Press the right (►) arrow button until Black Burst appears in the menu,
and then press the ENTER button.
e. Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the menu.
15. Check the following and record Pass under PAL Functional Genlock and
Timing in the test record if all conditions are met. If any of these conditions
are not met, record Fail.
Check that the Ext Ref light on the front panel of the TG700 of the module
under test is a steady green.
Check that the Timing display on the waveform monitor reads 0 lines of
offset and less than .1 μs of horizontal offset.
Check that the waveform in the Vector display on the waveform monitor
is stable and not spinning
148
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
16. Set the Black 1 format of the GPS7 reference module to 1080 25p as follows:
a. From the SELECT OUTPUT menu, press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button until BLACK 1 appears, and then press the ENTER button.
b. You should see SELECT FORMAT in the menu. If you do not, press the
down (▼) arrow button until it appears.
c. Press the left (◄) arrow button until 1080 25p appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
d. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
17. Set the reference mode of the GPS7 under test to HD Sync as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) arrow button until REFERENCE appears in the menu,
and then press the ENTER button.
b. You should see SOURCE in the menu. If you do not, press the down
(▼) arrow button until it appears.
c. Press the right (►) arrow button until HD SYNC appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
d. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
18. Check the following and record Pass under 1080p25 Functional Lock and
Timing in the test record if all conditions are met. If any condition is not
met, record Fail.
Check that the Ext Ref light on the front panel of the TG700 of the module
under test is a steady green.
Check that the waveform in the Vector display on the waveform monitor
is stable and not spinning
NOTE. Since PAL has 4 possible color frame orientations when locked to
the 1080p25 reference signal, the timing display cannot by used with this
configuration.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
149
Performance Verification
Genlock Input Gain and Bit Integrity Test. Perform the following procedure to
check the Genlock input gain and bit integrity. This test should be performed in
factory mode. (See page 141, Start Up In Factory Mode.)
NOTE. This performance verification procedure can only be performed on GPS7
modules with the REF IN connector on the rear panel. If your module does not
have that input, you do not need to do this procedure.
1. If you have just finished the previous procedure, disconnect the 75 Ω BNC
cable attached to the BLACK 1 ( or BLACK 1 / REF) input of the reference
GPS7 from the BLACK 1 / REF IN input of the GPS7 under test. You will
not need a reference module for this test.
2. Go to the REFERENCE menu of the GPS7 under test.
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. You should see SOURCE in the menu. If you do not, press the down (▼)
arrow button until it appears.
5. Press the right (►) arrow button until Internal appears, and then press the
ENTER button.
6. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
7. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT OUTPUT appears.
8. You should see BLACK 1 in the menu. If you do not, press the left (◄) arrow
button until it appears, and then press the ENTER button.
9. You should see INPUT-OUTPUT in the menu. If you do not, press the down
(▼) arrow button until it appears.
10. You should see OUTPUT (if allowed) in the menu. If you do, press the
ENTER button. If you do not, press the right (►) arrow button until it appears
in the menu, and then press the ENTER button.
11. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT FORMAT appears in the
menu., and then press the ENTER button.
12. You should see NTSC in the menu. If you do, press the ENTER button. If
you do not, press the right (►) arrow button until it appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
13. Press the right (►) arrow button until Black Burst with Field REF appears,
and then press the ENTER button.
14. Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the menu.
15. Press the up (▲) arrow button until DIAGNOSTICS appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
16. Press the right arrow button until ADC BUS appears.
150
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
17. Check the following and record Pass or Fail under Genlock ADC Bus Stuck
and Genlock ADC Bus Short in the test record, depending on the following
conditions:
If all bits in the Stuck field show a “-”, they all have activity. Record Pass
in the test record.
If any bits in the Stuck field show an H or an L, then the bit is not moving.
Record Fail in the test record.
If all bits in the Short field show a “-”, then none as shorted together.
Record Pass in the test record.
If any bits in the Short field show an S, then record Fail in the test record.
18. Connect a 75 Ω terminator to the BLACK 1 / REF input of the GPS7.
19. Press the right (►) arrow button until GENLOCK INPUT appears in the
menu.
20. Record the Min and Max levels in Genlock input Min level and Genlock input
Max level in the test record.
21. Subtract the Min level from the Max level and compare the result to the
limits in the test record. Record the results in the Genlock input gain portion
of the test record.
22. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
LTC Input Gain and Impedance Test. Perform the following procedure to check
that the LTC input gain and impedance are functioning properly. This test should
be performed in factory mode. (See page 141, Start Up In Factory Mode.)
NOTE. This performance verification procedure can only be performed on GPS7
modules with the REF IN connector on the rear panel. If your module does not
have that input, you do not need to do this procedure.
1. If you have just finished the previous procedure, press the up (▲) arrow
button on the GPS7 module under test until SELECT LTC appears in the
menu, and then press the ENTER button to select LTC 1.
2. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until OUTPUT LEVEL appears
in the menu.
3. Press the right (►) arrow button until the level shows 5.0 Volt, and then
press the ENTER button.
4. Press the down (▼) arrow button until LTC1 LOOPBACK appears in the
menu.
5. Press the right arrow button (►) until Enable appears in the menu, and then
press the ENTER button.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
151
Performance Verification
6. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
7. Press the down (▼) arrow button until DIAGNOSTICS appears in the menu,
and then press the ENTER button.
8. Press the right (►) arrow button until LTC POS INPUT appears.
9. Record the Min and Max levels in LTC Positive input open circuit loop back
in the test record.
10. Subtract the Min level from the Max level and record the result in LTC
positive open circuit loop back gain in the test record.
11. Press the right (►) arrow button until LTC NEG INPUT appears.
12. Record the Min and Max levels in LTC Negative input open circuit loop back
in the test record.
13. Subtract the Min level from the Max level and record the result in LTC
negative open circuit loop back gain in the test record.
14. Connect a breakout cable to the LTC / GPI input of the GPS7 under test.
15. Connect a 600 Ω XLR load with meter access to LTC1 end of the breakout
cable.
16. Press the left (◄) arrow button to view the LTC POS Input diagnostic display
again.
17. Note the Min and Max levels for the LTC POS INPUT, and then subtract
the Min level from the Max level and record the result in LTC Positive input
terminated loop back Gain in the test record.
18. Repeat step 17 for LTC NEG INPUT.
Black Output Functional Test and Frame Pulse Test. Perform the following
procedure to check that Black signal output and internal frame pulse signals are
functioning properly.
If you have just finished the previous test, disconnect all the cables from the
module under test before beginning this procedure.
1. Connect an SDI signal, like one from a DVG7 or HDVG7 module, to the
SDI input of a WFM7120, and select that input as the active input on the
waveform monitor.
2. Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the GPS7 module to the external
reference input of the WFM7120, and terminate the loop through on the
monitor with a 75 Ω terminator.
3. Press the EXT REF button on the WFM7120.
152
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
4. Set Black 1 to NTSC on the GPS7 module:
a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to SELECT OUTPUT.
b. Press the ENTER button when Black 1 appears.
c. Press the ENTER button again when NTSC appears.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst.
e. Press the ENTER button.
5. Check that the WFM7120 shows NTSC as the reference input.
6. Record the result in the test record.
7. Press the CANCEL button to exit the NTSC submenu.
8. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 60i in the Select
Format menu.
9. Press the ENTER button.
10. Check that the WFM7120 shows a 1080 60i signal on the reference input.
11. Record the result in the test record.
12. Disconnect the Black 1 signal from the WFM7120 and module.
13. Connect the Black 2 output from the module to the Reference input of the
WFM7120.
14. Set Black 2 to a 1080i 50 signal on the GPS7 module:
a. Press the CANCEL button to exit the Black 1 submenu.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black 2.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 50i.
e. Press the ENTER button.
15. Check that the WFM7120 shows a 1080i 50 signal on the reference input.
16. Record the result in the test record.
17. Use the right (►) arrow button to select PAL.
18. Press the ENTER button.
19. Use the left (◄) arrow button to select Black Burst.
20. Press the ENTER button.
21. Check that the WFM7120 shows PAL on the reference input.
22. Record the result in the test record.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
153
Performance Verification
23. Press the CANCEL twice to exit the Select Format submenu.
24. Disconnect the Black 2 signal from the WFM7120 and the module.
25. Connect the Black 3 output from the module to the reference input of the
WFM7120.
26. Set Black 3 to a PAL signal on the GPS7 module:
a. Use the right (►) arrow button to select Black 3.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Use the right (►) arrow button to select PAL.
d. Press the ENTER button.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst.
f.
Press the ENTER button.
g. Check that the WFM7120 shows PAL on the reference input.
h. Press the CANCEL button to exit the PAL submenu.
27. Record the result in the test record.
28. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 24p.
29. Press the ENTER button.
30. Check that the WFM7120 shows 1080p 24 on the reference input.
31. Record the result in the test record.
32. Press the CANCEL button to exit the Select Format menu.
33. Disconnect the cable from the Black 3 input on the module.
Black Output Bit Integrity. Perform the following test to insure that all the bits in
the black generators are working correctly. This test should be performed in
factory mode. (See page 141, Start Up In Factory Mode.)
1. Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the module to the CMPST A input
on the WFM7120, and terminate the loop through with a 75 Ω terminator.
2. Activate the WFM7120 composite input by pressing the Input C button on
the WFM7120 front panel.
3. Press the MODULE button to select GPS7.
4. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, if needed, to select Black 1.
6. Press the ENTER button.
7. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT
CALIBRATION.
154
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
8. Press the ENTER button to select Amplitude Calibration.
NOTE. Write down the calibration setting (AMPL. DAC number) in case you
need to restore it later.
9. Use the right (►) arrow to select the RampHPF ramp signal.
10. Look at the three ramps on the WFM7120 display. The larger of the two
ramps should each have 16 equal steps.
NOTE. View the waveform display in full screen mode for easiest viewing.
11. Use the Gain function on the WFM7120 to expand the signal to 10X.
12. Now check that the shallowest ramp has 16 equal steps.
13. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
14. Check that the calibration setting has not changed. If it has, then restore the
original value.
15. Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the calibration menu.
16. Repeat this procedure for the Black 2 and Black 3 outputs.
Black Amplitude and Offset. Perform this procedure to check that Black signal
output amplitude and offset are adjusted to within specification. This test should
be performed in factory mode. (See page 141, Start Up In Factory Mode.)
NOTE. If any channel fails the following tests, then see the Adjust procedure to
set the gain/offset.
1. Connect the BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter to the voltmeter.
2. Connect the BNC T to the adapter.
3. Connect a 75 Ω precision terminator to one end of the BNC T connector.
4. Connect a 75 Ω BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector.
5. Connect the other end of the cable to the Black 1 output on the rear of the
module.
6. Press the MODULE button to select GPS7, if it is not already selected.
7. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
8. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, if needed, to select Black 1.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
155
Performance Verification
9. Press the ENTER button.
10. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT
CALIBRATION.
11. Press the ENTER button to select Amplitude Calibration.
NOTE. Write down the calibration setting (AMPL. DAC number) in case you
need to restore it later.
12. Check that the calibration mode signal is 0 V on the TG700 display. This
value is displayed in parentheses after the AMPL. DAC number.
13. Record the voltmeter reading in the test record. This is the offset value.
14. Use the right (►) arrow to select the 700 mV level.
15. Record the value in the test record.
16. Calculate the difference between the 700 mV and 0 mV signal levels and
record this in the test record.
17. Check that the calibration setting has not changed. If it has, then restore the
original value.
18. Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the calibration mode for the Black
1 signal.
19. Repeat the above steps for Black 2 and Black 3 outputs.
Black Output Rise and Fall Time. Perform this procedure to check that the Black
output rise and fall time meet specifications.
1. Connect the Black 1 output of the module to the oscilloscope and terminate
the input with a 75 Ω feedthrough terminator.
NOTE. Make sure that the oscilloscope input is set to 1 MΩ mode if you are using
the feedthrough terminator.
2. Press the MODULE button to select GPS7.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select SELECT OUTPUT.
4. Press the ENTER button to select Black 1.
5. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select SELECT FORMAT.
6. Press the ENTER button to select NTSC.
7. Press the ENTER button again to select Black Burst.
156
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
8. Use the oscilloscope to measure the 10 % to 90 % fall time of the falling
sync edge.
9. Record the result in the test record.
10. Press the CANCEL button to exit the NTSC submenu.
11. Use the right (►) arrow to select a 1080 60i signal format.
12. Press the ENTER button.
13. Use the oscilloscope to measure the 10% to 90% rise time of the rising edge
in the middle of the trilevel sync.
14. Record the result in the test record.
15. Repeat the above steps for Black 2 and Black 3 outputs.
Sine Amplitude. Perform this procedure to check the sine amplitude.
1. Connect the Black 3 output to the oscilloscope, and terminate the input with a
75 Ω feed-through terminator.
2. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select SELECT OUTPUT.
4. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black 3.
5. Press the ENTER button.
6. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CW 10 MHz.
7. Press the ENTER button.
8. Measure the amplitude of the sine wave on the oscilloscope.
9. Record the result in the test record.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
157
Performance Verification
LTC Level. Perform this test to check the LTC levels are within limits. This test
should be performed in factory mode. (See page 141, Start Up In Factory Mode.)
1. Create an LTC load with voltmeter access by soldering a 600 Ω resistor to
pins 2 and 3 of the female XLR connector.
2. Connect the LTC load with voltmeter access to the LTC 1 connector on the
LTC/GPIO breakout adapter cable.
3. Connect the LTC/GPIO adapter cable to the DSUB connector on the rear of
the module.
4. Connect a BNC-to-test clip adapter to the voltmeter using a BNC-to-Banana
adapter and BNC cable.
5. Attach the clips to either side of the 600 Ω resistor.
6. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
7. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select SELECT LTC.
8. Press the ENTER button to select LTC 1.
9. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
10. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Set maximum positive
voltage.
11. Press the ENTER button.
12. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Output Level.
13. Use the right (►) arrow button to select 5.0 V.
14. Press the ENTER button.
15. Record the voltage result in the test record.
16. Use the down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
17. Use the left (◄) arrow button to select Set maximum negative voltage.
18. Press the ENTER button.
19. Record the voltage result in the test record.
20. Solve for the difference between the two voltages you recorded to get the
p-p voltage.
21. Record the result in the test record.
22. Press the CANCEL button to exit the menu.
23. Repeat this procedure for LTC 2, LTC 3, and LTC 4.
158
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
GPI Output Functional Test. This procedure checks that the GPI output is
functioning properly.
1. Check that the antenna signal is connected to the antenna input of the module
and that the instrument shows the signal is locked:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button, if needed, to select STATUS.
c. Check that the top line of the status display shows Locked.
2. Connect GPI 1 output to the voltmeter:
a. Connect the BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter to the voltmeter.
b. Connect the LTC/GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC/GPI DSUB
on the back of the GPS7 module.
c. Connect the GPI 1 connector on the breakout cable to the
BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter.
3. Configure GPI 1 output to be asserted on unlock:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT GPIO.
c. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Output 1.
d. Press the ENTER button.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Loss of lock.
f.
Press the ENTER button.
4. Check that the voltage on the GPI 1 output measures between 4.5 V and 5.5 V.
5. Record the result in the test record.
6. Disconnect the antenna input. After 15 seconds, check that the GPI 1 output
is below 0.5 V.
7. Record the result in the test record.
8. Reconnect the antenna input.
9. Repeat this procedure for the GPI 2 output.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
159
Performance Verification
GPI Input Functional Test. This procedure checks that the GPI input is functioning
correctly.
1. Configure the GPS7 GPI input to reset the program time:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT GPIO.
c. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Input 1.
d. Press the ENTER button.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Reset Program Time.
f.
Press the ENTER button.
g. Press the CANCEL button to exit the Select GPIO menu.
2. Press the up (▲) arrow to select the STATUS display.
3. If needed, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to display Program
Time.
4. Write down the program time.
5. Connect the LTC/GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC/GPI DSUB on the
back of the GPS7 module.
6. Attach a 75 Ω terminator to the GPI input for 2 seconds, and then remove it.
7. Look at the program time now and compare it to the program time you wrote
down before. The time on the display should have reset to the default start
time of 00:00:00:00 and now be counting again.
8. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
Frequency Accuracy When Locked to GPS. This procedure checks that the
frequency is accurate when locked to the GPS.
1. Check that the antenna is connected to both a TG700 reference unit with a
GPS7 module (or other reference instrument) and the GPS7 module under test.
2. Check that both GPS modules have been on for 20 minutes to allow the ovens
to warm up.
3. Check that the signal is locked:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button, if needed, to select STATUS.
c. Check that the top line of the status display shows Locked.
4. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Signal Quality.
5. Check the value on both units. A value of 30 or above is adequate.
160
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
6. Go to the diagnostics page and check that both systems are in Fine mode. If
they are not, then allow them to warm up and stabilize.
a. Use the up (▲) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Press the right (►) arrow to display TUNE.
d. Check that Fine shows on the right side of the display.
e. Press CANCEL to exit Diagnostics menu.
7. Set the Black 1 output on both units to output NTSC:
a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black 1.
c. Press ENTER twice to select NTSC and Black Burst.
8. Connect Black 1 of the reference unit to the reference input to the WFM7120,
and terminate the other reference input on the system under test with a 75 Ω
terminator.
9. Connect Black 1 of the system under test to the CMPST A input of the
WFM7120, and terminate the loop through with a 75 Ω terminator.
10. Display the composite input on the WFM7120 and select external reference.
11. View the Vector Display in full screen mode.
12. Use the variable gain function to expand the burst to overlap the compass
rose graticule.
13. Write down the minimum and maximum vector phase you observe over a
30 second period.
14. Calculate the difference and record the result in the test record.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
161
Performance Verification
Frame Timing Accuracy. Perform this procedure to check the accuracy of the
frame timing.
This test set up is the same as the previous test.
1. Check that the antenna is connected to both a TG700 reference unit with a
GPS7 module (or other reference instrument) and the GPS7 module under
test, and that the instruments show the signal is locked:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button, if needed, to select STATUS.
c. Check that the top line of the status display shows Locked.
2. Check that both GPS modules have been on for 20 minutes to allow the ovens
to warm up.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Signal Quality.
4. Check the value on both units. A value of 30 or above is adequate.
5. Go to the diagnostics page and check that both systems are in Fine mode. If
they are not, then allow them to warm up and stabilize.
a. Use the up (▲) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Press the right arrow to display TUNE.
d. Check that Fine shows on the right side of the display.
e. Press CANCEL to exit Diagnostics menu.
6. Set the Black 1 output on both units to output NTSC:
a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black 1.
c. Press ENTER twice to select NTSC and Black Burst.
7. Connect Black 1 of the reference unit to the reference input to the WFM7120,
and terminate the other reference input on the system under test with a 75 Ω
terminator.
8. Connect Black 1 of the system under test to the CMPST A input of the
WFM7120, and terminate the loop through with a 75 Ω terminator.
9. Display the composite input on the WFM7120 and select external reference.
10. View the Timing Display in full screen mode.
11. Record the timing value in the test record.
162
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Internal Frequency Calibration. Perform the following procedure to set the internal
frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator. This adjustment stores the current
frequency of the oscillator while it is locked to a GPS or a reference signal, to be
used when in Internal mode. It can be done without any disruption to operation
and is best done in the operating environment of the instrument.
1. Connect the power cord to the TG700 mainframe.
2. Check for error messages as the instrument starts.
3. Connect a GPS signal to the rear of the module.
4. Allow the instrument to warm up for a minimum of 20 minutes.
5. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 : STATUS appears.
6. Check that the signal status shows Locked.
7. Check that signal lock indicator displays Fine:
a. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Press the right (►) arrow button to select TUNE.
d. Check that Fine is showing on the right side of the LCD display.
8. Press the MODULE button until TG700 appears.
9. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select UTILITY.
10. Press the ENTER button.
11. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select CAL OVEN : SELECT.
12. Press the ENTER button to access the Internal Frequency Calibration
submenu.
13. Press the ENTER button to start the calibration.
14. Record the calibration value in the test record.
NOTE. If the value is outside the test limits, then the Oven is near the edge of the
tune range and might need to be replaced.
15. Press the ENTER button to return to the calibration menu.
16. Press the CANCEL button to exit the calibration menu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
163
Performance Verification
Gain Calibration. Perform the following procedure to characterize the oscillator
frequency as a function of voltage. This adjustment needs to be performed in
factory mode and is only needed once to characterize the oscillator.
CAUTION. To avoid signal errors, only perform the Gain Calibration when the
instrument is out of service. This calibration temporarily disrupts the frequency of
all signals in the box.
1. Connect a GPS signal to the antenna input on the rear of the module.
2. If the instrument is not already in factory mode, put it in factory mode by
performing the following steps:
a. Cycle the mainframe power by unplugging the power cord from the rear
of the instrument and then holding the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button
while plugging the power back into the instrument. Continue to hold the
button during start up until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows
on the LCD display.
b. Allow the instrument to warm up for a minimum of 20 minutes.
3. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 : STATUS appears.
4. Check that the signal status shows Locked.
5. Check that signal lock indicator displays Fine:
a. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Press the right (►) arrow button to select TUNE.
d. Check that Fine is showing on the right side of the LCD display.
6. Press the MODULE button until TG700 appears.
7. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select UTILITY.
8. Press the ENTER button.
9. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select CAL OVEN : SELECT.
10. Press the right (►) arrow button to access the Gain Calibration submenu.
11. Press the ENTER button twice and follow the prompts on the LCD display
to calculate the gain value.
164
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
12. Wait approximately 20 seconds for the process to end.
13. Record the result in the test record.
NOTE. If the value is outside the test limits, then the Oven is near the edge of the
tune range and might need to be replaced.
14. Press the ENTER button to return to the Calibration menu.
15. Press the CANCEL button to exit the Diagnostics menu.
16. Cycle the power to exit factory mode.
This completes the GPS7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
HD3G7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the HD3G7 HD 3Gb/s SDI
Video Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 109: Required equipment for HD3G7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
HD-SDI video signal
generator
1
1080 59.94i 100% Color Bars signal
output and embedded audio capabilities
Tektronix TG700 with HDVG7 generator
module
Waveform monitor
1
HD-SDI waveform monitor with 3 Gb/s
capabilities
Tektronix WFM8300 with Option 3G
and Option PHY
Digital signal analyzer
1
Digital signal analyzer with a 20 GHz
electrical sampling module and a probe
interface module
Tektronix DSA8200 with an 80E04
electrical sampling module and an
80A03 Tek Connect Probe Interface
module
Tekconnect 75 Ω to 50 Ω
adapter with BNC input
connector
1
Tektronix part number TCA75
Tekconnect adapter with
BNC input connector
1
Tektronix part number TCA-BNC
20 m (75 ft) cable
1
Cable used to optimize WFM8300
equalizer operation
MarkerTek 1694-B-B-75
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
165
Performance Verification
Table 109: Required equipment for HD3G7 performance verification (cont.)
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
10 m, 20 m, 40 m, and
80 m cables or cable
clone
1 each
Used in the Cable Accommodation and
Converter Jitter Test
Standard Faraday HD Cable clone.
Allows up to 150 m test. Consists of the
following:
FFC010A075 (10 m)
FFC020A075 (20 m)
FFC040A075 (40 m)
FFC080A075 (80 m)
1 m (3 ft) BNC to BNC
high-bandwidth cable
3
Used to hook DUT to scope for
Amplitude and rise time tests
Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
Stable 10 kHz sine
generator
1
CW sine wave, with 800 mV p-p ± 5%
into 75 Ω, THD < 60 dBc, 10 kHz, and
less than 50 mV DC offset
A Tek AFG3101
Precision RMS voltmeter
1
Keithley 2700 DMM
6 dB SMA attenuator
1
Tektronix part number 015-1001-01
SMA (male) to BNC
(female) adapter
1
Tektronix part number 015-0554-00
75 Ω Precision terminator
1
75 Ω Precision terminator (Tektronix
part number 011-0102-03)
BNC to Banana Plug
adapter
1
Pomona model 1269
BNC T
1
Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC (female) to BNC
(female) 75 Ω barrel
1
Amphenol part number 31-70019
1 m (3 ft) 50 Ω cable
1
Tektronix part number 012-0057-01
166
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 110: HD3G7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function
Tested
Minimum
Maximum
1.
Initialization
2.
3.
HD3G7
diagnostics
Output function
and jitter
Value
Value
Power on
errors
Pass
Fail
TG700
diagnostics
Pass
Fail
Generator
Flex1
Pass
Fail
Generator
DDS1
Pass
Fail
Voltages
Pass
Fail
Signal 1
1080 50p
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Jitter
1080 50p
0 UI
0.25 UI
Signal 2
1080 59.94p
Jitter
1080 59.94p
0 UI
0.25 UI
Signal 2
1080 24p
Jitter
1080 24p
4.
Input function,
cable
accommodation
and converter
jitter
0 UI
0.15 UI
WFM8300
1080 60p
Jitter readout
0 UI
Jit lock
cable length
0.25 UI
80 m
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
167
Performance Verification
Table 110: HD3G7 test record (cont.)
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function
Tested
Minimum
Maximum
5.
Amplitude
characterization
Value
Value
DMM
measurement
(Typically,
0.2880 V)
Cycle RMS
(Typically,
116 mV)
Cycle mean
(Typically,
1 mV)
6.
SDI Output
Amplitude
RMS
amplitude of
sine wave
(Typically,
116 mV)
SQRT((cycle
RMS)^2
- (cycle
mean)^2)
Attenuation
factor
2.35
2.55
776 mV
824 mV
776 mV
824 mV
Signal 1
amplitude as
measured
(Typically,
328 mV)
Signal 1
amplitude
calculated
Signal 2
amplitude as
measured
(Typically,
328 mV)
Signal 2
amplitude
calculated
168
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Table 110: HD3G7 test record (cont.)
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function
Tested
Minimum
Maximum
7.
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme
Signal 1
Rise time
0 ps
135 ps
Fall time
0 ps
135 ps
Difference
-50 ps
+50 ps
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme
Signal 2
Rise time
0 ps
135 ps
Fall time
0 ps
135 ps
Difference
-50 ps
+50 ps
Trigger Output
Level
Trigger
amplitude
648 mV
792 mV
8.
Value
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Value
169
Performance Verification
Procedures
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe
that can cause injury or death if the instrument is not handled properly. Only
qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification Preparation.)
Performance verification procedures can be performed individually, if needed.
HD3G7 Diagnostics
Check the HD3G7 module Diagnostics before doing the performance verification
tests:
1. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the HD3G7 module.
2. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. Use the right (►) arrow button to scroll through the diagnostics readings to
view the PLL STATUS submenu.
5. Check that Flex1 shows Lock and record Pass or Fail in the test record.
6. Use the right (►) arrow button to view the DDS STATUS submenu.
7. Check that DDS1 Phase shows Lock and record Pass or Fail in the test record.
8. Use the right (►) arrow button to view the voltage submenus, 1 through 4.
9. Check that all voltages show OK for each VOLTAGE MON, and record
Pass or Fail in the test record.
NOTE. It is common to see CRC errors after changing input connections or if
there is no signal.
10. Press the CANCEL button to exit the DIAGNOSTICS submenu.
Output Functional and
Jitter Test
1. Connect a 20 m cable from the SIGNAL 1 output on the module to the 3G
SDI A input of a WFM8300 with Options 3G and PHY.
2. Press the MODULE button on the TG700 to select HD3G7: STATUS.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select OUTPUT MODE.
4. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 3G-Level A (1920 x
1080), and then press the ENTER button to select that mode.
170
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
5. Press the FORMAT button to view the SELECT FORMAT submenu.
6. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 50p, and then press
the ENTER button to select that format.
7. Press the CANCEL button to exit the SELECT FORMAT submenu.
8. Check that the WFM8300 displays 1080p 50 in the status bar.
9. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
10. Select a tile on the WFM8300 and press the FULL button to view the display
full screen.
11. Press the EYE button on the WFM8300 and center the jitter waveform. If
necessary, press and hold the EYE button to access the menu and set the
jitter HP filter to 100 kHz.
12. Record the UI jitter reading shown below the WFM8300 jitter thermometer
in the test record.
13. Repeat steps 5 - 12 for the SIGNAL 2 output on the HD3G7, changing the
format to 1080 59.94p.
14. Repeat steps 3 - 12 for the SIGNAL 2 output on the HD3G7, changing the
Output Mode to HD (1920 x 1080) and the format to 1080 24p.
Input Functional, Cable
Accommodation and
Converter Jitter Test
1. Press the MODULE button on the TG700 to select HDVG7: STATUS.
2. Press the FORMAT button to view the SELECT FORMAT submenu.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a 1080 60i signal.
4. Press the ENTER button.
5. Press the COLOR BAR button and select a 75% color bar signal.
6. Connect one end of a 1 m BNC cable to the HD3G7 HD SDI IN input.
Connect the other end of the 1 m cable to a 75 Ω BNC to BNC barrel, and
then another 1 m BNC cable to that. Finally, connect the end of that cable to
the SIGNAL 1 output of the HDVG7.
7. Connect a cable from the SIGNAL 2 output on the HD3G7 to the
3G SDI A input on the WFM8300.
8. Press the MODULE button on the TG700 to select HD3G7: STATUS.
9. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select OUTPUT MODE.
10. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 3G-Level A (1920 x
1080).
11. Press the ENTER button.
12. Press the FORMAT button to view the SELECT FORMAT submenu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
171
Performance Verification
13. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a 1080 60p signal on
the HD3G7 module.
14. Press the ENTER button.
15. Press the CANCEL button to exit the Format menu.
16. Press the OTHER button to enter converter mode. Allow a few seconds for
the signal to stabilize before proceeding to the next step.
17. Check that the WFM8300 shows the 1080p 60 signal, with no errors, in the
status bar on the display.
18. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
19. Select a tile on the WFM8300 and press the FULL button to view the display
full screen.
20. Press the EYE button on the WFM8300 and center the jitter waveform. If
necessary, press and hold the EYE button to access the menu and set the
jitter HP filter to 100 kHz.
21. Record the jitter shown on the jitter readout in the test record.
22. Connect an 80 m cable clone between the BNC to BNC barrel and a 1 m BNC
cable setup that connects the HDVG7 SIGNAL 1 output and the HD3G7
HD SDI IN input.
23. Press the CANCEL button on the TG700 to exit the convertor mode menu.
24. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the HD3G7 module.
25. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
26. Press the ENTER button.
27. Use the right (►) arrow button to select PLL STATUS
28. Check that the Jit readout shows Lock.
29. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
30. Use the right (►) arrow button to select CRC Errors.
NOTE. The Diagnostics menu includes an item that allows you to clear CRC
errors from the log. It is common to see errors after changing input connections.
31. If the there are CRC errors, press the right (►) arrow button to select Clear
CRC Errors.
32. Press the ENTER button to clear the errors.
33. Press the left arrow button to return to the CRC Errors submenu and check
that the number of errors is now zero.
172
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
34. Check that no CRC errors are detected for a period of 5 seconds.
35. Insert other cable clones to the 80 m clone to simulate increasing cable length
in 10 m increments until EDH errors start to occur.
NOTE. Errors may occur while you are connecting additional cables.
36. Record the longest cable length that was error free for 5 seconds in the test
record.
NOTE. If there are no errors up to 150 m, record >150 m.
Amplitude
Characterization
There are two parts to this test: Part A and Part B. Part A sets up a reference to the
DMM. Part B characterizes the test system.
Part A: Reference against the DMM.
1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. One end of a 1 m high bandwidth cable to the AFG3101 output
b. The other end of the 1 m cable to the BNC T
c. The BNC T to a BNC to banana adapter
d. The other end of the BNC T to a precision terminator
e. The end of the banana adapter to the input of the DMM
2. Set the AFG3101 to output a sine wave into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
3. Set the AFG3101 to a 10 kHz output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
4. Set the AFG3101 to a 800 mVp-p output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
5. Check that the output of the AFG3101 is On.
6. Set the DMM to measure AC voltage using a medium filter setting. Set the
range to allow for four digits of RMS amplitude.
7. Record the DMM measurement in the test record.
Set up the digital signal analyzer.
CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge can damage the oscilloscope modules. To
prevent damage, always work in a static free environment and discharge the
static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while
handling these modules.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
173
Performance Verification
1. Install the 80A03 output cable into the Channel 1/2 slot of the oscilloscope.
2. Install the 80E04 sampling head into the 80A03 adapter and connect the two
using the SMA cables.
3. Install the TCA-75 into the left port of the 80A03.
4. Install the TCA-BNC into the right port of the 80A03.
5. If needed, press the Default Settings button on the oscilloscope.
6. Press the Channel 1 button on the 80E04 sampling head to activate Channel 1.
Part B: Characterization of the test system.
1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. AFG3101 output to 1 m high bandwidth cable
b. The other end of the cable to a TCA-75
c. The TCA-75 to the 80A03 in the oscilloscope and plug-in
d. A 50 Ω cable from the AFG3101 trigger output
e. The other end of the 50 Ω cable to the BNC to SMA adapter
f.
The SMA adapter to the 6 dB pad
g. The 6 dB pad to the trigger direct input on the oscilloscope
2. Keep the AFG3101 at the same output as in Part A of this test.
3. Set the oscilloscope to a horizontal scale of 20 μs.
4. Set the oscilloscope to a vertical scale of 50 mV.
5. Set the oscilloscope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points.
6. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 1 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle RMS.
7. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 2 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle Mean.
8. Record the Cycle RMS and Cycle Mean values in the test record.
9. Calculate the corrected RMS amplitude of the sine wave:
SQRT((cycle RMS)^2 - (cycle mean)^2)
10. Record the result in the test record.
11. Calculate the total attenuation factor for the system. This is the DMM
measurement divided by the corrected RMS sine wave amplitude. This
attenuation factor will be used after measuring the signal outputs in the next
test.
12. Record the attenuation factor value in the test record.
174
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
SDI Output Amplitude
Perform this test with the instrument in factory mode. To put the instrument into
factory mode, perform the following procedure:
Start up in factory mode.
1. At the same time, press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL
ENABLE buttons briefly, then continue to hold the FRONT PANEL
ENABLE button until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows on the
display.
NOTE. The serial output level can be adjusted when the instrument is in factory
mode. Be careful not to accidentally adjust this level, as this will invalidate the
factory calibration. If you need to perform a serial output level adjustment, see
the TG700 service manual for the procedure.
SDI output amplitude procedure.
1. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the TRIGGER OUTPUT on the HD3G7 module
(through the BNC to SMA adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the
trigger direct input on a sampling oscilloscope.
2. Connect a 1 m high bandwidth cable from the SIGNAL 1 output of the
module to the TCA75 BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
3. Press the MODULE button until HD3G7: STATUS appears.
4. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
5. Press the ENTER button.
6. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square.
7. Press the ENTER button.
8. Set the scope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points, the
time/div to 2 ns, and the amplitude per division to 50 mV.
9. On the scope, select Measurement 3, Pulse-Amplitude, and then Amplitude to
measure the amplitude on the flat part of the long pulse.
10. Right click on the measurement readout, and select Show Statistics from
the pop-up menu.
11. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
12. Record the average value, which is indicated by the letter μ. Multiply μ by the
attenuation factor you obtained in the previous test.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
175
Performance Verification
13. Record the result in the test record.
14. Repeat this procedure for the SIGNAL 2 output on the HD3G7.
NOTE. To ensure SDI signal lock, cycle the power on the TG700 after completing
performance verification procedures in factory mode.
SDI Rise and Fall Time
Perform this procedure with the instrument in factory mode. (See page 175, Start
up in factory mode.)
1. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the TRIGGER OUTPUT on the HD3G7 module
through the SMA to BNC adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the trigger
direct input on a sampling oscilloscope.
2. Connect a cable from the SIGNAL 1 output of the module to the TCA75
BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
3. Press the MODULE button until HD3G7: STATUS appears.
4. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
5. Press the ENTER button.
6. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square.
7. Press the ENTER button.
8. On the oscilloscope, set the horizontal scale to 200 ps.
9. Set the horizontal position to put the rising edge of the waveform about 2.5
divisions to the left of center.
10. Set the oscilloscope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points.
11. On the oscilloscope, select Measurement 4 and then Pulse-Timing for the
Rise Time.
12. Select Measurement 5 and then Pulse-Timing for the Fall Time.
13. Select the Reference Level tab from Measure and set the reference high to
80% and the low to 20%.
14. Measure the rise time and record the result in the test record.
15. Use the horizontal position knob to put the falling edge about 2.5 divisions
left of center.
16. Measure the fall time and record the result in the test record.
17. Check that the difference between the rise and fall times is within the specified
limits and record the result in the test record.
18. Repeat this procedure for the SIGNAL 2 output on the HD3G7.
176
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Trigger Output Level
Perform this procedure with the instrument in factory mode. (See page 197, Start
up in factory mode.)
1. Connect a cable from the SIGNAL 1 output on the HD3G7 module through
the SMA to BNC adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the trigger direct
input on a sampling oscilloscope.
2. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the TRIGGER OUTPUT of the module to the
TCA-BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
3. Check that Channel 2 of the oscilloscope is on and that C2 is selected as
the active channel.
4. Press the MODULE button until HD3G7: STATUS appears.
5. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
6. Press the ENTER button.
7. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square.
8. Press the ENTER button.
9. Set the oscilloscope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points,
the time/div to 2 ns, and the amplitude per division to 100 mV.
10. On the oscilloscope, select Measurement 6 and set it to the channel that has
the TCA-BNC.
11. On the oscilloscope, select Measure > Pulse-Amplitude > Amplitude to
measure the trigger.
12. Record the results in the test record.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
177
Performance Verification
HDLG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the HDLG7 HD Dual Link
Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 111: Required equipment for HDLG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
HD-SDI video signal
generator
1
1080 59.94i 100% Color Bars signal
output and embedded audio capabilities
Tektronix TG700 with HDVG7 generator
module
HD waveform monitor
1
HD-SDI waveform monitor with eye
measurement capabilities
Tektronix WFM7100 Option PHY
75 Ω BNC cable
3
General purpose digital video
male-to-male BNC connectors, 1 or
2 m long
Belden 9281 or Tektronix part number
012-0159-01
75 Ω coaxial terminator
3
Male connector, precision
Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
178
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 112: HDLG7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Minimum
Cal Data
Maximum
1.
Serial Output
Amplitude
Link A (top BNC)
720 mV
mV
880 mV
Link A (bottom
BNC)
720 mV
mV
880 mV
Link B (top BNC)
720 mV
mV
880 mV
Link B (bottom
BNC)
720 mV
mV
880 mV
Link A (top BNC)
ps
270 ps
Link A (bottom
BNC)
ps
270 ps
Link B (top BNC)
ps
270 ps
Link B (bottom
BNC)
ps
270 ps
Link A (top BNC)
ps
270 ps
Link A (bottom
BNC)
ps
270 ps
Link B (top BNC)
ps
270 ps
Link B (bottom
BNC)
ps
270 ps
2.
3.
Serial Output Rise
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
Serial Output Fall
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
179
Performance Verification
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Generator
module is operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Serial Digital Video Outputs. This test verifies that serial digital signals are output
correctly from the LINK A and LINK B connectors. The following equipment
is required for the test:
HD waveform monitor
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify that serial digital signals are output
correctly from the LINK A and LINK B connectors.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the upper LINK A connector on the
HDLG7 module to the SDI A input on the HD waveform monitor as shown in
the following figure.
2. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the lower LINK A connector on
the HDLG7 module as shown in the following figure.
Figure 28: Equipment connections for verifying the serial digital video outputs
180
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
3. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the TG700 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press ENTER to recall the factory default settings.
4. Select the 100% Color Bars signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the HDLG7 main menu.
b. Press the COLOR BAR test signal button until the 100% Color Bars
signal is selected.
5. Select the 1080 59.94p format as follows:
a. Press the FORMAT button.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 59.94p, and
then press ENTER.
c. Press the CANCEL button to return to the module main menu.
6. Set the HD waveform monitor to take Eye measurements.
7. Verify the eye amplitude and rise and fall times values are as follows:
Eye amplitude: 720 mV to 880 mV
Rise and fall time (20% to 80%): < 270 ps
8. Change the BNC cable connection from the upper LINK A connector to the
lower LINK A connector and change the 75 Ω coaxial terminator from the
lower LINK A connector to the upper LINK A connector.
9. Repeat step 7.
10. Change the BNC cable connection from the lower LINK A connector to the
upper LINK B connector and change the 75 Ω coaxial terminator from the
upper LINK A connector to the lower LINK B connector.
11. Repeat step 7.
12. Change the BNC cable connection from the upper LINK B connector to the
lower LINK B connector and change the 75 Ω coaxial terminator from the
lower LINK B connector to the upper LINK B connector.
13. Repeat step 7.
This completes the HDLG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
181
Performance Verification
HDVG7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the HDVG7 HDTV Video
Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 113: Required equipment for HDVG7 performance verification
Item
No.
Digital television
waveform monitor
1
Tektronix WFM1125 Option 0D
HDTV picture monitor
1
Sony HDM1220J
Digital audio monitor
1
Tektronix 764
Sampling oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 6 GHz or higher
Tektronix TDS820
75 Ω BNC cable
5
Length: 42 inches
Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
50 Ω BNC to SMA
adapter
1
Tektronix part number 015-1018-00
75 Ω coaxial terminator
5
Tektronix part number 011-0102-01
75 Ω signal adapter
1
182
Minimum requirement
Bandwidth: 1 GHz
Recommended equipment
Tektronix AMT75
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 114: HDVG7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function Tested
Cal Data
1.
Serial Output
Amplitude
Minimum
————
mV
Maximum
————
————
mV
————
SIGNAL 1 (Typical
value: 800 mV)
SIGNAL 2 (Typical
value: 800 mV)
2.
3.
Serial Output Rise
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
SIGNAL 1
ps
270 ps
SIGNAL 2
ps
270 ps
Serial Output Fall
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
SIGNAL 1
ps
270 ps
SIGNAL 2
ps
270 ps
Serial Output
Amplitude
BLACK 1 (Typical
value: 800 mV)
————
mV
————
BLACK 2 (Typical
value: 800 mV)
————
mV
————
Option BK
4.
5.
6.
Serial Output Rise
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
BLACK 1
ps
270 ps
BLACK 2
ps
270 ps
Serial Output Fall
Time (20% to 80%
amplitude points)
BLACK 1
ps
270 ps
BLACK 2
ps
270 ps
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
183
Performance Verification
Procedures
The following procedure determines if the HDVG7 HDTV Video Generator
module is operating correctly.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification.)
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Serial Digital Outputs. This test verifies that serial digital signals are output
correctly from the SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors. The following
equipment is required for the test:
Digital TV waveform monitor
HDTV picture monitor
Digital audio monitor
Five 75 Ω BNC cables
Five 75 Ω coaxial terminators
Perform the following procedure to verify that serial digital signals are output
correctly from the SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect SIGNAL 1 connector on the HDVG7
Generator module to the CHA connector on the digital TV waveform monitor
rear panel as shown in the following figure. (See Figure 29.)
2. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the SIGNAL 2 connector on the
HDVG7 Generator module.
3. Use the 75 Ω BNC cables to connect Pr, Pb, and Y ANALOG OUT connectors
on the digital TV waveform monitor rear panel to INPUT A R/PR, B/PB, G/Y
connectors, respectively, on the HDTV picture monitor rear panel as shown in
the following figure. (See Figure 29.)
4. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminators to terminate the other loop through to R/PR,
B/PB, and G/Y connectors on the HDTV picture monitor rear panel.
5. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect AUDIO CHA connector on the digital TV
waveform monitor rear panel to CH1-2 BNC connector on the digital audio
monitor rear panel as shown in the following figure. (See Figure 29.)
6. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the other loop through to CH1-2
BNC connector on the digital audio monitor rear panel.
184
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Figure 29: Equipment connections for verifying the HDVG7 serial digital outputs
7. Set the digital TV waveform monitor settings as follows:
Control
Setting
Input
CH A
Display
Parade
Format
240M/274M
Interlaced/Progressive
Interlaced
8. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the TG700 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press ENTER to recall the factory default settings.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
185
Performance Verification
9. Select the 75% Color Bars signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the HDVG7 main menu.
b. Press the COLOR BAR test signal button until the 75% Color Bars
signal is selected.
10. Turn on the circle overlay as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select OVERLAY, and
then press ENTER.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Circle, and then
press ENTER to access the CIRCLE OVERLAY submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable, and then
press ENTER.
11. Turn on the embedded audio for Group 1 as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select AUDIO
(EMBEDDED).
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1, and then
press ENTER to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable, and then
press ENTER.
e. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
12. Check the displayed waveform and CRC error:
a. Verify that the waveform and the overlay circle are correctly displayed on
the digital TV waveform monitor.
b. Verify that the CRC ERROR LED on the digital TV waveform monitor
does not light.
13. Check the embedded audio:
a. On the digital audio monitor front panel, press the MENU button to
display the menu.
b. Select the Input item from the menu, and select CH1-2 input:
BNC-unbalanced item from the submenu.
c. On the digital audio monitor front panel, press the CLEAR button to
clear the menu.
d. On the digital audio monitor front panel, press the CH STATUS button to
display CHANNEL STATUS view.
186
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
e. In the view, check that CRC errors are not displayed.
f.
On the digital audio monitor front panel, press the Audio View button.
g. Verify that the digital audio monitor bar graphs show both Channel 1
and Channel 2 at –20 dBfs.
14. Check that the correct color bar and the overlay text are displayed on the
HDTV picture monitor.
15. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL 1 connector to the
SIGNAL 2 connector and change the 75 Ω terminator from the SIGNAL 2
connector to the SIGNAL 1 connector on the HDVG7 Generator module.
16. Repeat steps 12 through 14.
Serial Digital Black Outputs (Option BK Only). This test verifies that serial digital
black signals are output correctly from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors.
17. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL 2 connector to the
BLACK 1 connector and change the 75 Ω terminator from the SIGNAL 1
connector to the BLACK 2 connector on the HDVG7 Generator module.
18. Select the 40% Flat Field signal as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to return the module main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select BLACK (OPTION).
c. Press ENTER to access the BLACK submenu.
d. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SIGNAL.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 40% Flat Field, and
then press ENTER.
19. Turn on the embedded audio for Group 1 as follows:
a. Press the CANCEL button to return the BLACK submenu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select AUDIO
(EMBEDDED).
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1, and then
press ENTER to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable, and then
press ENTER.
e. Press the CANCEL button to return the BLACK submenu.
20. Verify that the waveform is correctly displayed on the digital TV waveform
monitor.
21. Verify that the CRC ERROR LED on the digital TV waveform monitor does
not light.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
187
Performance Verification
22. Verify that the digital audio monitor bar graphs show both Channel 1 and
Channel 2 at –20 dBfs.
23. Verify that the correct flat field signal is displayed on the HDTV picture
monitor.
24. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector and change the 75 Ω terminator from BLACK 2 connector to the
BLACK 1 connector on the HDVG7 Generator module.
25. Repeat steps 20 through 23.
Eye Pattern Check.
This test verifies the signal level and eye pattern of the SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2
outputs. The following equipment is required for the test:
Sampling oscilloscope
75 Ω signal adapter (AMT75)
75 Ω BNC cable
SMA-to-BNC adapter
75 Ω coaxial terminator
Perform the following procedure to verify the signal level and eye pattern of
the SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 outputs.
1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, 75 Ω signal adapter, and SMA-to-BNC adapter to
connect the SIGNAL 1 connector on the HDVG7 Generator module to the
CH1 input connector on the oscilloscope as shown in the following figure.
NOTE. Some sampling oscilloscopes do not automatically adjust their readouts
to account for the ÷5 attenuation of the AMT75. You must remember to account
for this attenuation while viewing the oscilloscope readouts if you are using an
oscilloscope of this type.
2. Use the 75 Ω coaxial terminator to terminate the SIGNAL 2 connector on the
HDVG7 Generator module.
3. Set the sampling oscilloscope settings as follows:
188
Control
Setting
Vertical
30 mV/div
Horizontal
200 ps/div
Main Position
700 ps
Trig Source
CH1
Trig Level
0V
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Control
Setting
Trig Slope
Rising Edge
Acquire Menu
Normal
DISPLAY
Variable persistence: 500 ms
Measure
Amplitude
Figure 30: Equipment connection for verifying the output level and eye pattern
4. Verify that SIGNAL 1 eye pattern displayed on the sampling oscilloscope is
fully open. The following figure shows an example of the eye pattern for
an acceptable output signal.
Figure 31: Example of eye pattern for an acceptable output signal
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
189
Performance Verification
5. Use the sampling oscilloscope to measure that the amplitude, rise and fall
time are as follows:
Amplitude: approximately 160 mV Rise and fall time: t 270 ps (20% to 80%)
6. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL 1 connector to the
SIGNAL 2 connector and change the 75 Ω terminator from the SIGNAL 2
connector to the SIGNAL 1 connector on the HDVG7 Generator module.
7. Check that SIGNAL 2 eye pattern displayed on the sampling oscilloscope is
fully open. (See Figure 31.)
8. Repeat step 5.
BLACK Output Eye Pattern Check (Option BK Only). This test verifies the signal
level and eye pattern of the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs.
9. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL 2 connector to the
BLACK 1 connector and change the 75 Ω terminator from the SIGNAL 1
connector to the BLACK 2 connector on the HDVG7 Generator module.
10. Check that BLACK 1 eye pattern displayed on the sampling oscilloscope is
fully open. (See Figure 31.)
11. Repeat step 5.
12. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 1 connector to the
BLACK 2 connector and change the 75 Ω terminator from the BLACK 2
connector to the BLACK 1 connector on the HDVG7 Generator module.
13. Check that SIGNAL 2 eye pattern displayed on the sampling oscilloscope is
fully open. (See Figure 31.)
14. Repeat step 5.
This completes the HDVG7 module performance verification procedure. If you
require further assistance, contact your nearest Tektronix Service Center.
190
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
SDI7 Module Performance Verification
The following procedures verify the functionality of the SDI7 Dual Channel
SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module.
Required Equipment
The following table lists the required equipment for the following procedure.
Table 115: Required equipment for SDI7 performance verification
Item
No.
Minimum requirement
Recommended equipment
Waveform monitor
1
HD-SDI waveform monitor with 3 Gb/s
capabilities
Tektronix WFM8300 with Option 3G
and Option PHY
Digital signal analyzer
1
Digital signal analyzer with a 20 GHz
electrical sampling module and a probe
interface module
Tektronix DSA8200 with an 80E04
electrical sampling module and an
80A03 Tek Connect Probe Interface
module
Tekconnect 75 Ω to 50 Ω
adapter with BNC input
connector
1
Tektronix part number TCA75
Tekconnect adapter with
BNC input connector
1
Tektronix part number TCA-BNC
1 m (3 ft) BNC to BNC
high-bandwidth cable
3
Used to hook DUT to scope for
Amplitude and rise time tests
Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
Stable 10 kHz sine
generator
1
CW sine wave, with 800 mV p-p ± 5%
into 75 Ω, THD < 60 dBc, 10 kHz, and
less than 50 mV DC offset
A Tek AFG3101
Precision RMS voltmeter
1
Keithley 2700 DMM
6 dB SMA attenuator
1
Tektronix part number 015-1001-01
SMA (male) to BNC
(female) adapter
1
Tektronix part number 015-0554-00
75 Ω Precision terminator
1
75 Ω Precision terminator (Tektronix
part number 011-0102-03)
BNC to Banana Plug
adapter
1
Pomona model 1269
BNC T
1
Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC (female) to BNC
(female) 75 Ω barrel
1
Amphenol part number 31-70019
1 m (3 ft) 50 Ω cable
1
Tektronix part number 012-0057-01
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
191
Performance Verification
Test Record
Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results.
Table 116: SDI7 test record
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function
Tested
Minimum
Maximum
1.
Initialization
2.
192
SDI7
diagnostics
Value
Value
Power on
errors
Pass
Fail
TG700
diagnostics
Pass
Fail
PLL status
Flex0
Flex1
Pass
Pass
Fail
Fail
DDS status
DDS0
DDS1
Pass
Pass
Fail
Fail
Voltages
+1.2 V
+1.5 V
+1.8 V
+3.3 V
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Fail
Fail
Fail
Fail
Memory test
SRAM
DDR2
Pass
Pass
Fail
Fail
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Table 116: SDI7 test record (cont.)
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function
Tested
Minimum
Maximum
3.
Output function
and jitter
(channel 1 and
channel 2)
Signal 1A
1080 50p/1080 50i
Jitter
0 ns
1080 50p/1080 50i
0 ns
0 ns
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
Pass
Fail
50 ps p-p
Signal 2B
1080 24p
Jitter
1080 24p
Pass
50 ps p-p
Signal 2B
1080 59.94p/1080 59.94i
Jitter
0 ns
1080 59.94p/1080 59.94i
Fail
50 ps p-p
Signal 2A
1080 50p/1080 50i
Jitter
0 ns
1080 50p/1080 50i
Pass
50 ps p-p
Signal 1B
1080 24p
Jitter
1080 24p
Value
50 ps p-p
Signal 1B
1080 59.94p/1080 59.94i
Jitter
0 ns
1080 59.94p/1080 59.94i
Value
50 ps p-p
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
193
Performance Verification
Table 116: SDI7 test record (cont.)
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function
Tested
Minimum
Maximum
4.
Amplitude
characterization
Value
Value
DMM
measurement
(Typically,
0.2880 V)
Cycle RMS
(Typically,
116 mV)
Cycle mean
(Typically,
1 mV)
5.
194
SDI Output
Amplitude
(channel 1 and
channel 2)
RMS
amplitude of
sine wave
(Typically,
116 mV)
SQRT((cycle
RMS)^2
- (cycle
mean)^2)
Attenuation
factor
2.35
2.55
Signal 1A
amplitude
calculated
776 mV
824 mV
Signal 1B
amplitude
calculated
776 mV
824 mV
Signal 2A
amplitude
calculated
776 mV
824 mV
Signal 2B
amplitude
calculated
776 mV
824 mV
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Table 116: SDI7 test record (cont.)
Serial
Number
Cal Date
Temperature
Humidity
Step
Function
Tested
Minimum
Maximum
6.
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme
(HD and 3G)
Signal 1A
Rise time
0 ps
135 ps
Fall time
0 ps
135 ps
Difference
-50 ps
+50 ps
Rise time
400 ps
1000 ps
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme (SD)
Signal 1A
Fall time
400 ps
1000 ps
Difference
-500 ps
+500 ps
Rise time
0 ps
135 ps
Fall time
0 ps
135 ps
Difference
-50 ps
+50 ps
Rise time
400 ps
1000 ps
Fall time
400 ps
1000 ps
Difference
-500 ps
+500 ps
Rise time
0 ps
135 ps
Fall time
0 ps
135 ps
Difference
-50 ps
+50 ps
Rise time
400 ps
1000 ps
Fall time
400 ps
1000 ps
Difference
-500 ps
+500 ps
Rise time
0 ps
135 ps
Fall time
0 ps
135 ps
Difference
-50 ps
+50 ps
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme (SD)
Signal 2B
Rise time
400 ps
1000 ps
Trigger Output
Level
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme
(HD and 3G)
Signal 1B
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme (SD)
Signal 1B
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme
(HD and 3G)
Signal 2A
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme (SD)
Signal 2A
SDI Rise and
Fall TIme
(HD and 3G)
Signal 2B
7.
Fall time
400 ps
1000 ps
Difference
-500 ps
+500 ps
Trigger
amplitude
472.5 mV
577.5 mV
Value
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Value
195
Performance Verification
Preparation
WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe
that can cause injury or death if the instrument is not handled properly. Only
qualified service personnel should perform these procedures.
Be sure you have performed the performance verification preparation before
proceeding. (See page 55, Performance Verification Preparation.)
Performance verification procedures can be performed individually, if needed.
Check for Option 3G
Use the mainframe UTILITY menu to determine if Option 3G is enabled on the
SDI7 module. Some of the steps in the verification procedures depend on whether
the option is enabled or not.
1. Press the MODULE button until TG700 : PRESET is displayed.
2. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG700 : UTILITY,
and then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG700 : UTILITY :
OPTIONS ENABLED is displayed.
4. The second line of the display indicates the option status:
SDI7[slot number] None indicates that Option 3G is not enabled
SDI7[slot number] 3G indicates that Option 3G is enabled
NOTE. If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe, use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to display the option status of the desired SDI7
module.
5. Press the CANCEL button to return to the mainframe menu.
196
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
SDI7 Diagnostics
Check the SDI7 module Diagnostics before performing the performance
verification tests:
Start up in factory mode. Some of the SDI7 diagnostics are available only when
the instrument is in factory mode. To put the instrument into factory mode:
NOTE. The serial output level can be adjusted when the instrument is in factory
mode. Be careful not to accidentally adjust this level, as this will invalidate the
factory calibration. If you need to perform a serial output level adjustment, see
the TG700 service manual for the procedure.
1. At the same time, press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL
ENABLE buttons briefly, then continue to hold the FRONT PANEL
ENABLE button until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows on the
display.
Restore factory presets.
2. Press the MODULE button until TG700 : PRESET is displayed, and then
press the ENTER button to enter the PRESET submenu.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default, and
then press the ENTER button.
4. When Preserve network settings? is displayed, press the ENTER button.
5. After the factory presets are loaded, press the CANCEL button to exit the
PRESET submenu.
Diagnostics procedure.
6. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the SDI7 module.
7. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS, and
then press the ENTER button.
8. If necessary, use the right (►) arrow button to scroll through the diagnostics
readings to view the PLL STATUS display.
9. Check that Flex0 and Flex1 both show Lock, and then record Pass or Fail
in the test record.
10. Use the right (►) arrow button to view the DDS STATUS display.
11. Check that DDS0 Phase and DDS1 Phase both show Lock, and then record
Pass or Fail in the test record.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
197
Performance Verification
12. Use the right (►) arrow button to view the VOLTAGE MON displays,
1 through 4.
13. Check that all voltages show OK for each VOLTAGE MON display, and then
record Pass or Fail in the test record.
14. Use the right (►) arrow button to select SRAM MEM TEST, and then
press the ENTER button to start the test. The SRAM memory test takes
approximately 60 seconds to complete.
15. Check that the display reads SRAM: 0 bad sectors detected, and then record
Pass or Fail in the test record.
16. Use the right (►) arrow button to select DDR2 MEM TEST, and then
press the ENTER button to start the test. The DDR2 memory test takes
approximately 7 seconds to complete.
17. Check that the display reads DDR2: 0 errors detected, and then record Pass
or Fail in the test record.
18. Press the CANCEL button to exit the DIAGNOSTICS submenu.
Exit factory mode. Exit the factory mode before continuing with the next
verification steps.
19. Remove and then reattach the power cord to restart the TG700.
198
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Output Functional and
Jitter Test
1. Connect a 1 m cable from the SIGNAL 1A output on the module to the
3G SDI A input of a WFM8300 with Options 3G and PHY.
2. Press the MODULE button on the TG700 to select SDI7[x-1]: STATUS.
NOTE. The SDI7 module provides two channels of output. The display indicates
which SDI7 channel is selected. For example, a display of SDI7[3-1] indicates
that the SDI7 module is installed in slot 3 and that channel 1 is selected. A display
of SDI7[3-2] indicates that channel 2 is selected.
Press the MODULE button to advance from channel 1 to channel 2. You can press
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to switch between channels 1 and 2 of the
selected SDI7 module when the STATUS menu is displayed as shown below.
3. Press the down (▼) arrow button to select OUTPUT MODE, and then use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the appropriate output mode
for your SDI7 module as listed below. When the desired output mode is
displayed, press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Option 3G enabled: select the 3G-Level A (1920 × 1080) output mode.
Option 3G not enabled: select the HD 1080 59.94i output mode.
4. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select the appropriate format for your SDI7 module as listed below. When the
desired format is displayed, press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Option 3G enabled: select the 1080 50p format.
Option 3G not enabled: select the 1080 50i format.
5. Press the CANCEL button to exit the SELECT FORMAT submenu.
6. Check that the WFM8300 displays either 1080p 50 or 1080i 50 in the status
bar, depending on the Output Mode and Format you selected above.
7. Record Pass or Fail in the test record.
8. Select a tile on the WFM8300 and press the FULL button to view the display
full screen.
9. Press the EYE button on the WFM8300. If necessary, press and hold the EYE
button to access the menu and set the jitter HP filter to 100 kHz.
10. On the TG700, press the COLOR BAR button until the 75% Color Bars
(75% White) signal is selected. Press the CANCEL button to exit the test
signal menu.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
199
Performance Verification
11. Measure the jitter on the WFM8300 as follows:
a. Set the WFM8300 vertical gain to 5x.
b. Set the WFM8300 horizontal magnification to 10x.
c. Center an eye crossing on the WFM8300 screen.
d. Press the WFM8300 Display button, and then turn on Infinite Persistence
and set the waveform intensity to 50%.
e. Turn on the WFM8300 time cursors.
f.
Shift the WFM8300 trace position to restart the persistence. Wait
30 seconds, and then use the time cursors to measure the width of the eye
at the narrowest point on the WFM8300 display.
12. Record the jitter reading in the test record.
13. Repeat steps 3 - 12 for the SIGNAL 1B output on the SDI7, using a format
of 1080 59.94p for instruments with Option 3G or 1080 59.94i for those
instruments without the option.
14. Repeat steps 3 - 12 for the SIGNAL 1B output on the SDI7, changing the
Output Mode to HD (1920 x 1080) and the format to 1080 24p.
15. Press the MODULE button on the TG700 to select SDI7[x-2]: STATUS.
16. Repeat steps 3 - 12 for the SIGNAL 2A output on the SDI7.
17. Repeat steps 3 - 12 for the SIGNAL 2B output on the SDI7, using a format
of 1080 59.94p for instruments with Option 3G or 1080 59.94i for those
instruments without the option.
18. Repeat steps 3 - 12 for the SIGNAL 2B output on the SDI7, changing the
Output Mode to HD (1920 x 1080) and the format to 1080 24p.
200
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Amplitude
Characterization
There are two parts to this test: Part A and Part B. Part A sets up a reference to the
DMM. Part B characterizes the test system.
Part A: Reference against the DMM.
1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. One end of a 1 m high bandwidth cable to the AFG3101 output
b. The other end of the 1 m cable to the BNC T
c. The BNC T to a BNC to banana adapter
d. The other end of the BNC T to a precision terminator
e. The end of the banana adapter to the input of the DMM
2. Set the AFG3101 to output a sine wave into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
3. Set the AFG3101 to a 10 kHz output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
4. Set the AFG3101 to a 800 mVp-p output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
5. Check that the output of the AFG3101 is On.
6. Set the DMM to measure AC voltage using a medium filter setting. Set the
range to allow for four digits of RMS amplitude.
7. Record the DMM measurement in the test record.
Set up the digital signal analyzer.
CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge can damage the oscilloscope modules. To
prevent damage, always work in a static free environment and discharge the
static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while
handling these modules.
1. Install the 80A03 output cable into the Channel 1/2 slot of the oscilloscope.
2. Install the 80E04 sampling head into the 80A03 adapter and connect the two
using the SMA cables.
3. Install the TCA-75 into the left port of the 80A03.
4. Install the TCA-BNC into the right port of the 80A03.
5. If needed, press the Default Settings button on the oscilloscope.
6. Press the Channel 1 button on the 80E04 sampling head to activate Channel 1.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
201
Performance Verification
Part B: Characterization of the test system.
1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. AFG3101 output to 1 m high bandwidth cable
b. The other end of the cable to a TCA-75
c. The TCA-75 to the 80A03 in the oscilloscope and plug-in
d. A 50 Ω cable from the AFG3101 trigger output
e. The other end of the 50 Ω cable to the BNC to SMA adapter
f.
The SMA adapter to the 6 dB pad
g. The 6 dB pad to the trigger direct input on the oscilloscope
2. Keep the AFG3101 at the same output as in Part A of this test.
3. Set the oscilloscope to a horizontal scale of 20 μs.
4. Set the oscilloscope to a vertical scale of 50 mV.
5. Set the oscilloscope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points.
6. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 1 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle RMS.
7. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 2 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle Mean.
8. Record the Cycle RMS and Cycle Mean values in the test record.
9. Calculate the corrected RMS amplitude of the sine wave:
SQRT((cycle RMS)2 - (cycle mean)2)
10. Record the result in the test record.
11. Calculate the total attenuation factor for the system. This is the DMM
measurement divided by the corrected RMS sine wave amplitude. This
attenuation factor will be used after measuring the signal outputs in the next
test.
12. Record the attenuation factor value in the test record.
13. Enter the attenuation factor value into the oscilloscope:
a. On the oscilloscope, press the SETUP DIALOG button.
b. Select the “Vert” tab from the top of the setup page.
c. Select the “External Attenuation” box, and then enter the attenuation
factor calculated in step 11 above.
202
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
SDI Output Amplitude
Perform this test with the instrument in factory mode.
Start up in factory mode. To put the instrument into factory mode:
1. At the same time, press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL
ENABLE buttons briefly, then continue to hold the FRONT PANEL
ENABLE button until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows on the
display.
NOTE. The serial output level can be adjusted when the instrument is in factory
mode. Be careful not to accidentally adjust this level, as this will invalidate the
factory calibration. If you need to perform a serial output level adjustment, see
the TG700 service manual for the procedure.
SDI output amplitude procedure.
2. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS appears.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TRIGGER OUTPUT,
and then press the ENTER button.
4. Press the right (►) arrow button to select System Clock, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
5. Press the down (▼) arrow button to display Source: CH[x].
6. Press the right (►) arrow button to select Source: CH1, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
7. Press the CANCEL button to exit the TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu.
8. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the TRIGGER OUTPUT on the SDI7 module
(through the BNC to SMA adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the
trigger direct input on a sampling oscilloscope.
9. Connect a 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the SIGNAL 1A output of the
module to the TCA75 BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
10. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS appears.
11. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION, and
then press the ENTER button.
12. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.
13. Set the scope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points, the
time/div to 2 ns, and the amplitude per division to 100 mV.
14. On the scope, select Measurement 3, Pulse-Amplitude, and then Amplitude to
measure the amplitude on the flat part of the long pulse.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
203
Performance Verification
15. Right click on the measurement readout, and select Show Statistics and Show
Annotations from the pop-up menu.
16. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
17. Record the average value, which is indicated by the letter μ. Multiply μ by the
attenuation factor you obtained in step 11 of the previous test.
NOTE. If you entered the attenuation factor into the scope at the end of the
amplitude characterization test (See page 201, Amplitude Characterization.), then
the scope will display the multiplication result.
18. Record the result in the test record.
19. Move the signal cable to the SIGNAL 1B output on the SDI7 module, and
then repeat steps 16 - 18.
20. Move the signal cable to the SIGNAL 2A output on the SDI7 module, and
then repeat steps 16 - 18.
21. Move the signal cable to the SIGNAL 2B output on the SDI7 module, and
then repeat steps 16 - 18.
22. If you are performing the verification procedures in order, you can skip
forward to step 12 of the SDI Rise and Fall Time test. Otherwise, proceed
to the next step.
Exit factory mode. Exit the factory mode before continuing with the next
verification steps.
23. Remove and then reattach the power cord to restart the TG700.
SDI Rise and Fall Time
Perform this test with the instrument in factory mode.
Start up in factory mode. To put the instrument into factory mode:
1. At the same time, press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL
ENABLE buttons briefly, then continue to hold the FRONT PANEL
ENABLE button until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows on the
display.
NOTE. The serial output level can be adjusted when the instrument is in factory
mode. Be careful not to accidentally adjust this level, as this will invalidate the
factory calibration. If you need to perform a serial output level adjustment, see
the TG700 service manual for the procedure.
204
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Rise and fall time procedure.
2. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the TRIGGER OUTPUT on the SDI7 module
through the SMA to BNC adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the trigger
direct input on a sampling oscilloscope.
3. Connect a cable from the SIGNAL 1A output of the module to the TCA75
BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
4. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS appears.
5. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TRIGGER OUTPUT,
and then press the ENTER button.
6. Press the right (►) arrow button to select System Clock, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
7. Press the down (▼) arrow button to display Source: CH[x].
8. Press the right (►) arrow button to select Source: CH1, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
9. Press the CANCEL button to exit the TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu.
10. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION, and
then press the ENTER button.
11. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.
12. On the oscilloscope, set the horizontal scale to 200 ps.
13. Set the oscilloscope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points.
14. On the oscilloscope, select Measurement 4 and then Pulse-Timing for the
Rise Time.
15. Select the Reference Level tab from Measure and set the reference high to
80% and the low to 20%.
16. Select Measurement 5 and then Pulse-Timing for the Fall Time.
17. Select the Reference Level tab from Measure and set the reference high to
80% and the low to 20%.
18. Set the horizontal position to put the rising edge of the waveform about 2.5
divisions to the left of center.
19. Measure the rise time and record the result in the test record.
20. Use the horizontal position knob to put the falling edge about 2.5 divisions
left of center.
21. Measure the fall time and record the result in the test record.
22. Check that the difference between the rise and fall times is within the specified
limits and record the result in the test record.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
205
Performance Verification
23. Repeat steps 18 - 22 for the SIGNAL 1B output on the SDI7.
24. Repeat steps 4 - 23 for channel 2 of the SDI7 module, selecting CH2 as the
trigger source and using the SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B connectors.
25. Press the CANCEL button to exit the Calibration mode.
26. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS is displayed.
27. Set the Output Mode on the SDI7 to SD:
a. Press the down (▼) arrow button to select OUTPUT MODE, and then
use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the SD output mode.
Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
b. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
to select the 525 59.94i format. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.
28. Connect a 1 m cable from the SIGNAL 1A output on the module to the
3G SDI A input of a WFM8300 with Options 3G and PHY.
29. Set up the WFM8300 to display an eye diagram and eye measurements full
screen.
30. Record the rise time, fall time, and difference in the test record.
31. Repeat steps 27 - 30 for the SIGNAL 1B connector.
32. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-2]: STATUS is displayed.
33. Repeat steps 27 - 30 for the SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B connectors.
34. If you are performing the verification procedures in order, you can skip
forward to step 2 of the Trigger Output Level test. Otherwise, proceed to
the next step.
Exit factory mode. Exit the factory mode before continuing with the next
verification steps.
35. Remove and then reattach the power cord to restart the TG700.
206
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
Performance Verification
Trigger Output Level
Perform this procedure with the instrument in factory mode.
Start up in factory mode. To put the instrument into factory mode:
1. At the same time, press the MODULE, FORMAT, and FRONT PANEL
ENABLE buttons briefly, then continue to hold the FRONT PANEL
ENABLE button until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows on the
display.
NOTE. The serial output level can be adjusted when the instrument is in factory
mode. Be careful not to accidentally adjust this level, as this will invalidate the
factory calibration. If you need to perform a serial output level adjustment, see
the TG700 service manual for the procedure.
Trigger output level procedure.
2. Connect a cable from the SIGNAL 1A output on the SDI7 module through
the SMA to BNC adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the trigger direct
input on a sampling oscilloscope.
3. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the TRIGGER OUTPUT of the module to the
TCA-BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
4. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS appears.
5. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TRIGGER OUTPUT,
and then press the ENTER button.
6. Press the right (►) arrow button to select System Clock, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
7. Press the down (▼) arrow button to display Source: CH[x].
8. Press the right (►) arrow button to select Source: CH1, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
9. Press the CANCEL button to exit the TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu.
10. Check that Channel 2 of the oscilloscope is on and that C2 is selected as
the active channel.
11. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS appears.
12. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
13. Press the ENTER button.
14. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square.
15. Press the ENTER button.
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
207
Performance Verification
16. Set the oscilloscope to averaging 16 and set the record length to 4000 points,
the time/div to 2 ns, and the amplitude per division to 100 mV.
17. On the oscilloscope, select Measurement 6 and set it to the channel that has
the TCA-BNC.
18. On the oscilloscope, select Measure > Pulse-Amplitude > Amplitude to
measure the trigger.
19. Record the results in the test record.
Exit factory mode. Exit the factory mode before continuing with the next
verification steps.
20. Remove and then reattach the power cord to restart the TG700.
208
TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification
">